WO2022126631A1 - Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks - Google Patents

Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022126631A1
WO2022126631A1 PCT/CN2020/137703 CN2020137703W WO2022126631A1 WO 2022126631 A1 WO2022126631 A1 WO 2022126631A1 CN 2020137703 W CN2020137703 W CN 2020137703W WO 2022126631 A1 WO2022126631 A1 WO 2022126631A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network
information
terminal device
networks
slices
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/137703
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
孙海洋
朱方园
李岩
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202080107986.6A priority Critical patent/CN116762399A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2020/137703 priority patent/WO2022126631A1/en
Publication of WO2022126631A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022126631A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/16Central resource management; Negotiation of resources or communication parameters, e.g. negotiating bandwidth or QoS [Quality of Service]

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, apparatus and system for registering with multiple networks.
  • Network slicing technology can provide isolated network environments for different application scenarios by establishing virtual independent logical networks on the same network infrastructure, so that different application scenarios can customize network functions and features according to their own needs.
  • QoS quality of service
  • a public land mobile network is a network established and operated by operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public.
  • the network slices supported by different PLMNs may be the same or different.
  • a user equipment moves from a home public land mobile network (HPLMN) to a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN). Since the network slices supported by HPLMN may not be exactly the same as those supported by VPLMN, and the UE expects to access multiple different network slices to obtain services of various types of services, the UE can use multiple network slices in HPLMN One of the network slices may no longer be available in this VPLMN. In this way, the UE cannot use all expected types of services, which reduces the user experience.
  • This application describes a method, apparatus and system for registering with multiple networks.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device.
  • the method includes: the network device acquires information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access; the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is accessed by multiple network slices Supported by at least one network in the network; the network device sends information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device, and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register with the multiple networks.
  • the network device determines multiple networks that can support the multiple network slices requested for access, and sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can register with the multiple networks, through the registered to the multiple networks.
  • Multiple networks are used to use multiple network slices requested by the terminal device to access, so as to meet the requirements of the network slice expected to be used by the terminal device, better provide services for users, and improve user experience.
  • multiple networks may refer to multiple PLMNs.
  • the above method can be applied to a scenario where the terminal device moves out of the HPLMN, which can be understood as a roaming scenario or a cross-PLMN scenario. Different PLMNs in the roaming place support different network slices.
  • the terminal device can register with multiple PLMNs, and use multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple PLMNs.
  • the multiple networks may refer to multiple subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnets may refer to a non-public network NPN.
  • the multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN.
  • Different subnets under an HPLMN or a VPLMN support different network slices.
  • a terminal device can register with multiple subnets, and use multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple subnets.
  • the above description is also applicable to the methods provided in other aspects of this application, and will not be repeated here.
  • Registering to multiple networks can be understood as “registering to multiple networks at the same time”. “Concurrently” does not limit the terminal device to perform the action of registering to multiple networks at the same time.
  • the terminal device can first register with the first network among the multiple networks, and then register with other networks among the multiple networks. When connecting to other networks in the plurality of networks, the terminal device remains registered in the first network.
  • the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance.
  • the UDM apparatus may receive the information of the above-mentioned multiple network slices from the terminal equipment through the mobility management AMF apparatus, and send the information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal equipment through the AMF apparatus.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • the network slices supported by each network in ; the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices according to the corresponding information and the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network device acquires the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then the network device obtains information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access according to the information to determine a plurality of networks, each of the plurality of network slices being supported by at least one of the plurality of networks.
  • the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device sends the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus information; the network equipment receives roaming preferred SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network equipment determines multiple networks according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus determines multiple networks according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds it back to the network device by means of SOR information.
  • this embodiment can be applied to the above-mentioned roaming scenario.
  • the above method further includes: the network device determines information associated with multiple networks, wherein the information associated with multiple networks indicates the multiple networks, or, when multiple networks include the terminal device currently registered the first network, the information associated with the multiple networks may also indicate information of at least one network in the multiple networks except the first network. That is, after the network device determines the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, the network currently registered by the terminal device can be removed to determine the information associated with the multiple networks. With this embodiment, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
  • the network device determining multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices includes: the network device determining a network set, where the network set includes the foregoing multiple networks. Then, the network device sends information of a network set including multiple networks to the terminal device, and the terminal device can satisfy the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access by registering with the multiple networks in the network set.
  • the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device determines multiple network sets, wherein each of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access Network slicing is supported by at least one of the multiple networks in each of the multiple network sets, in other words, each network set in the multiple network sets includes multiple Multiple networks for network slicing.
  • the network device may select one network set from multiple network sets as the determined multiple networks and send it to the terminal device.
  • the network device may send multiple network sets that meet the conditions to the terminal device, where the multiple network sets include the network sets where the multiple networks to which the terminal device finally registers are located.
  • the network set where the multiple networks to which the terminal device is finally registered is located is the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets.
  • the terminal device selects a network set that meets the conditions, and registers with the networks in the network set.
  • the network device sending information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device includes: the network device sending SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes information associated with multiple networks. That is, after the network device determines the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices are included in the SOR information, and the network device sends the terminal device through the SOR information the multiple networks associated with the multiple networks. information.
  • this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a terminal device.
  • the method includes: the terminal device sends information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device; the terminal device receives information from the network device of multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, wherein the multiple network slices are Each network slice is supported by at least one of the multiple networks; the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks. For example, if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to at least one network of the multiple networks except the first network; or, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks.
  • the terminal device eventually registers with the above-mentioned multiple networks.
  • the terminal device registers with the multiple networks according to the information received from the multiple networks, and uses the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple networks registered to the multiple networks, so as to meet the expected use of the terminal device. meet the needs of network slicing, better serve users and improve user experience.
  • the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance.
  • the terminal device can send the information of multiple network slices for which access is requested to the UDM device through the AMF device, and can also receive the information of the above-mentioned multiple networks from the UDM device through the mobility management AMF device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the terminal device receives information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device, including: the terminal device receives roaming preference SOR information from the network device, where the SOR information includes information of multiple networks. That is, the terminal device can receive information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device in the form of receiving SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks, including: the terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assists in updating the user-controlled selector according to the SOR information; The operator-controlled selector or the user-controlled selector is registered with at least one of the plurality of networks.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives, from the network device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
  • the terminal device receiving information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device includes: the terminal device receiving multiple network sets from the network device, the multiple network sets including the first network set,
  • the first set of networks includes a plurality of networks.
  • registering the terminal device with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks includes: the terminal device selects the first network set from the multiple network sets, and according to the information of the multiple networks in the first network set, Register with at least one of the multiple networks.
  • the first network set is the network set with the highest priority among the plurality of network sets.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a terminal device.
  • the method includes: the terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and network slices supported by each network in the network set, or in other words, the first information includes the network set and each network in the network set The association of network slices supported by the network.
  • the terminal device selects, from the network set, multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one of the multiple networks;
  • the terminal device is registered with at least one of the multiple networks.
  • the terminal device For example, if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to at least one network of the multiple networks except the first network; or, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks. Regardless of the method, the terminal device eventually registers with the above-mentioned multiple networks. According to the above solution, the terminal device selects multiple networks and registers with the multiple networks, and uses the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the terminal device. requirements, better serve users, and improve user experience.
  • the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance.
  • the terminal device may receive the above-mentioned first information from the UDM device through the mobility management AMF device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sends, to the network device, information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the terminal device receiving the first information from the network device includes: the terminal device receiving the roaming preference SOR information from the network device, and the SOR information includes the above-mentioned first information, that is, the SOR information includes the network set and the network set.
  • the association of network slices supported by each network in That is to say, the terminal device can not only directly receive the network set and the association relationship of the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the network device, but in another implementation manner, the network set and the networks supported by each network in the network set
  • the association relationship of slices can be presented in the form of SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the terminal device selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, including: the terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assistant according to the first information in the SOR information. Update the selector controlled by the user; the terminal device selects multiple networks according to the updated selector controlled by the operator or the selector controlled by the user.
  • each network in the network set is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • the terminal device sends information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device, the received first information does not support requesting access with the terminal device.
  • the network of any one of the multiple network slices can be removed. That is, each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receiving, from the network device, indication information indicating that the terminal device is registered with multiple networks.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device.
  • the method includes: the network device obtains information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device; the network device determines first information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate a network set and Network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network device sends the first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
  • the network device determines a network set capable of supporting at least one network slice among the multiple network slices requested by the terminal device to access, and sends the network set and the network slice supported by each network in the network set to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the first information, it registers with the network in the network set according to the first information, and uses multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to it, so as to achieve the network that the terminal device expects to use
  • the demand for slicing can better serve users and improve user experience.
  • the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance.
  • the UDM apparatus may receive information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the terminal equipment through the mobility management AMF apparatus, and send the first information to the terminal equipment through the AMF apparatus.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • Slice the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information and the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. That is to say, the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then selects the network slices according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • a network set that supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device is obtained, and the information of the supported network slice corresponding to the network set is obtained and presented in the form of first information.
  • the network device determines the first information, including: the network device sends information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF device; After receiving the roaming preference SOR information, the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. That is, the SOR-AF apparatus generates SOR information according to information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds back the SOR information to the network device, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the network set in the first information indicates the multiple networks, or, when the network set includes the first network currently registered by the terminal device, the network set in the first information indicates the network other than the first network. at least one network. That is, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device determining the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it may remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information. With this implementation, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
  • sending the first information by the network device to the terminal device includes: the network device sends SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the first information. That is, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device through the SOR information.
  • this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device.
  • the method includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks; the network device determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and each network set in the network set. network slices supported by each network; the network device sends the first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
  • the network device determines a network set, and sends the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first information, the terminal device registers to the network in the network set according to the network slice to be accessed by the terminal device and the first information, and uses the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to, In order to meet the needs of network slices expected to be used by terminal devices, it can better provide services for users and improve user experience.
  • the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance.
  • the UDM device may receive capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device through the mobility management AMF device, and send the first information to the terminal device through the AMF device.
  • the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. Slicing; the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information and the capability information of the terminal device. That is to say, the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network slice information supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. A form of information presents the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information on the network slices supported by each of the networks to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • the network device determining the first information includes: the network device sends capability information of the terminal device to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF device; the network device receives the roaming preference SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network device The first information is determined according to the SOR information. That is, the SOR-AF apparatus generates the first information according to the capability information of the terminal device, and feeds it back to the network device in the form of SOR information, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information.
  • this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the network set in the first information indicates the multiple networks, or, when the network set includes the first network currently registered by the terminal device, the first information indicates at least one network other than the first network. That is, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device determining the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it can remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information to obtain the final multiple networks. With this implementation, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
  • sending the first information by the network device to the terminal device includes: the network device sends SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the first information. That is, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device through the SOR information.
  • this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is performed by a unified data management UDM device.
  • the method includes: the UDM apparatus obtains the identifier of the serving AMF, and separately stores the context information of multiple networks to which the terminal device is registered, and the context information corresponding to each network in the multiple networks includes the identifier of the serving AMF. That is to say, the network device stores the association information of the multiple networks and the AMF of the service corresponding to each of the multiple networks.
  • the AMF of this service provides access management services for the terminal device.
  • the UDM device When the terminal device registers with the first network and subsequently registers with the second network, the UDM device will store the identifiers of the AMFs of the services corresponding to the first network and the first network, and the identifiers of the AMFs of the services corresponding to the second network and the second network , and will not trigger the terminal device to deregister with the first network.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, the method being performed by an SOR-AF device.
  • the method includes: the SOR-AF apparatus receives information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the network equipment; the SOR-AF apparatus generates roaming preference SOR information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment, The SOR information is used to indicate multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one network in the multiple networks; the SOR-AF apparatus sends the SOR information to the network device .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a roaming preference application function SOR-AF device.
  • the method includes: the SOR-AF apparatus receives information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the network equipment; the SOR-AF apparatus generates roaming preference SOR information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment, The SOR information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one network in the network set; Send SOR information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor, which is configured to read and run a program from a memory to implement the method (for example, when the communication device is a unified data management (UDM) device), or, to implement the method as described above in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner (eg, when the communication device is a terminal device), or, to realize the method as described above
  • the method of the third aspect or any possible implementation manner for example, when the communication apparatus is a terminal device
  • to implement the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner for example, when the communication apparatus is a terminal device) UDM device
  • the method as the fifth aspect above or any possible implementation manner for example, when the communication device is a UDM device
  • the sixth aspect or any possible implementation manner as above for example, when the communication device is a UDM device
  • to implement the method of the seventh aspect or any possible implementation manner for example, when the communication device is a roaming preference application function SOR-
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including a network device and a terminal device, the network device can perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner, and the terminal device can perform the second aspect or The method of any possible embodiment.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including a network device and a terminal device, the terminal device can execute the method of the third aspect or any possible implementation manner, and the network device can execute the fourth aspect Or the method of any possible implementation manner, or, the network device may execute the fifth aspect or the method of any possible implementation manner.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including an access and mobility management function AMF device and a unified data management UDM device, where the UDM device can execute the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner , or, the UDM apparatus may perform the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner, or the UDM apparatus may perform the method of the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner, or the UDM apparatus may perform the sixth aspect or the method of any possible implementation manner Aspect or the method of any possible embodiment.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including a unified data management UDM device and a roaming preference application function SOR-AF device, where the UDM device can execute the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner , the SOR-AF device may perform the method of the embodiment of the seventh aspect; or, the UDM device may perform the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner or the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner, the SOR - The AF device may perform the method of the eighth aspect or any possible embodiment.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation, or the second aspect or the method of any possible embodiment, or the third aspect or the method of any possible embodiment, or the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the fifth aspect or any possible embodiment
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, cause a processor to execute the first aspect or any possible or the method of the second aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the third aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment.
  • the method of the fifth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the sixth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the seventh aspect or any possible embodiment, or the eighth aspect or any possible embodiment way method.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of registering to multiple networks in a scenario applicable to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of registering to multiple networks in another scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application
  • 3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of network architectures in a roaming scenario to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
  • FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 are schematic diagrams of the network architecture in the PLMN to which the embodiment of the application is applied in a scenario where multiple subnets are laid out;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the interaction of a flow of SOR-AF generating SOR information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another flow interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another SOR-AF generating SOR information process interaction according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic interaction flow diagram of another method for registering with multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5G will usher in an era of the Internet of Everything.
  • 5G supports three scenarios: eMBB, mMTC, and URLLC.
  • the three scenarios include diversified and differentiated applications.
  • eMBB Based on breakthroughs in spectrum utilization and spectrum bandwidth technology on the wireless side, 5G can provide a transmission rate that is more than 10 times faster than 4G. For the current popular AR/VR and high-definition video live broadcast, only the ultra-high speed of 5G can meet the demand, and the transmission speed of 4G cannot be supported. Now, when using VR to watch high-definition or large-scale interactive games, you need to use a network cable to obtain data. In the future, you can connect wirelessly through a 5G network, and VR/AR can get a fast experience.
  • 5G Through technologies such as multi-user shared access and ultra-dense heterogeneous networks, 5G can support access to 1 million devices per square kilometer, which is 10 times that of 4G.
  • public facilities such as street lights, manhole covers, and water meters already have network connection capabilities and can be managed remotely, but 5G will have greater innovation.
  • the public equipment of various industries in the city can be connected to the intelligent management platform.
  • These public facilities work together through the 5G network and can be managed in a unified manner with only a small number of maintenance personnel, greatly improving the operational efficiency of the city.
  • URLLC The most typical application in 5G scenarios is autonomous driving.
  • the most commonly used scenarios for autonomous driving such as emergency braking, vehicle-to-vehicle, vehicle-to-person, vehicle-to-infrastructure and other multi-channel communications are carried out at the same time, requiring a large amount of data processing in an instant and make decisions. Therefore, the network needs to have large bandwidth, low latency and high reliability at the same time, and the 5G network has the ability to deal with this scenario.
  • NB-IoT narrowband internet of things
  • Network slicing technology allows operators to segment multiple virtual networks on one hardware infrastructure, allocate resources on demand, and flexibly combine capabilities to meet the different needs of various services.
  • the operator When a new requirement is proposed and the current network cannot meet the requirement, the operator only needs to create a new slicing network for this requirement without affecting the existing slicing network, so that the service can be launched at the fastest speed.
  • Network slicing is to virtualize multiple end-to-end networks based on a common hardware through slicing technology.
  • Each network has different network functions and adapts to different types of service requirements. That is, a network slice is a logically isolated network used to support specific network capabilities and network characteristics. For example, after purchasing physical resources, operators use physical resources to virtualize an eMBB slicing network for public Internet services, and then use physical resources to virtualize a mMTC slicing network for the smart meter reading requirements of certain manufacturers in vertical industries.
  • Each slice network provides services for different business scenarios.
  • the 5G standard also summarizes the requirements of different services for network functions into three typical scenarios.
  • the corresponding types of network slices corresponding to these three typical scenarios are eMBB slices, mMTC slices, and URLLC slices.
  • S-NSSAI Single network slice selection assistance information
  • S-NSSAI is used to identify a network slice.
  • one S-NSSAI can be associated with one or more network slice instances, and one network slice instance can be associated with one or more S-NSSAIs.
  • eMBB slice 1, eMBB slice 2, and eMBB slice 3 are all eMBB slices, and their S-NSSAI values are all 0x01000000;
  • eMBB+mMTC slice 4 can serve both eMBB type services and mMTC services.
  • S-NSSAI includes two parts: slice/service type (SST) and slice differentiator (SD):
  • SST refers to the expected network slicing behavior in terms of features and services.
  • the standard value range of SST is 1, 2, and 3.
  • a value of 1 indicates eMBB
  • a value of 2 indicates URLLC
  • a value of 3 indicates massive Internet of things (MIoT).
  • SD is optional information used to supplement SST to distinguish multiple network slices of the same slice/service type.
  • the SST and SD parts are combined to represent a slice type and multiple slices of the same slice type.
  • the value of S-NSSAI is 0x01000000, 0x02000000, and 0x03000000, which represent eMBB type slices, URLLC type slices, and MIoT type slices, respectively.
  • the S-NSSAI values of 0x01000001 and 0x01000002 indicate eMBB type slices, which can serve user group 1 and user group 2 respectively.
  • NSSAI Network slice selection assistance information
  • NSSAI is a collection of S-NSSNI.
  • the NSSAI used in the 5G network includes requested NSSAI (requested NSSAI), allowed NSSAI (allowed NSSAI), rejected NSSAI (rejected NSSAI) and subscribed NSSAI (subscribed NSSAI), and their specific definitions are shown in Table 1:
  • PLMN is a network established and operated by operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public.
  • the UE selects the PLMN according to the following priorities:
  • the currently registered PLMN (registered PLMN), or a PLMN (equivalent RPLMN) equivalent to the currently registered PLMN;
  • HPLMN or PLMN (EPLMN) equivalent to HPLMN
  • user-controlled PLMN selector user-controlled PLMN selector
  • the PLMN selectors in the third and fourth positions each include a set of priority PLMN lists for the UE to select, as shown in Table 2.
  • Each PLMN selector includes a list of PLMNs in descending order of priority. If the UE cannot select the first and second PLMNs, it selects the PLMN according to the user-controlled PLMN selector in the third place, and then the UE selects the PLMN with the highest priority according to the order of the PLMNs in the PLMN selector. PLMN, for example, PLMN1 in Table 2. If the UE cannot select the PLMN in the first, second and third positions, it will select the PLMN according to the PLMN selector controlled by the operator in the fourth position. Similarly, the UE can select the PLMN according to the PLMN selector in the PLMN selector. , the PLMN with higher priority is selected first.
  • SOR is a technique in which the HPLMN directs roaming UEs to register with the preferred roaming network. For example, when the roaming agreement is changed, the UDM of the HPLMN sends roaming preference (steering of roaming, SOR) information to the UE.
  • the SOR information includes at least one of: (a) a list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations, (b) a secured packet that Contains a list of combinations of the above preferred PLMNs or access technologies encapsulated by security mechanisms; (c) neither of the above is provided. Among them, (a) to (c) are generated according to the operator's data analysis.
  • the SOR information can be used to update the PLMN list in the above-mentioned user-controlled PLMN selector or operator-controlled PLMN selector.
  • the UE selects and registers the PLMN according to the priority of the PLMN selector and the priority of the PLMN in the PLMN selector. For example, the default SOR information is used to update the operator-controlled PLMN selector.
  • registering with a network can also be understood as accessing the network, which is expressed as "registering" with the network below.
  • NPN Non-Public Network
  • NPN is a network for non-public network users, NPN can be used exclusively for private entities, such as enterprises. NPN can be deployed in different forms, specifically, NPN can be deployed as a completely independent network, can be hosted by PLMN, and can be used as a network slice of PLMN. There are two types of NPNs:
  • NPN Single-alone non-public networks, SNPN
  • the SNPN is operated by the NPN operator and may not rely on the network functions provided by the PLMN.
  • the UE subscribes to one or more NPNs, and a SNPN is identified by the combination of the PLMN ID and the network identifier (NID, Network identifier).
  • NID network identifier
  • NPN Public network integrated NPN, PNI-NPN
  • PNI-NPN can provide NPN service through PLMN network, such as NPN function by allocating one or more network slices for NPN.
  • the PNI-NPN has a concept of a closed access group (Closed Access Group, CAG), which can achieve the effect of preventing other UEs from registering with the NPN.
  • CAG Closed Access Group
  • PNI-NPN determines a CAG by the PLMN ID and CAG ID.
  • the UE subscription information includes the CAG ID. Users without CAG-only indication information can support handover between PNI-NPN and PLMN networks.
  • the network slices supported by different PLMNs may be the same or different.
  • the network slice supported by the HPLMN is different from the network slice supported by the VPLMN, that is, the S-NSSAI of the HPLMN can only be Individual VPLMN use. Therefore, the UE can only use a non-preferred VPLMN in some areas of the roaming place, and the VPLMN cannot support all the network slices that the UE expects to use, so the UE cannot use all the network slices that the UE wants to use in one PLMN.
  • the UE wants to use service 1 and service 2, where service 1 is served by network slice 1 and service 2 is served by network slice 2.
  • the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2.
  • the HPLMN can support network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 when registering with the HPLMN.
  • the slices supported by different PLMNs located in the roaming place are as shown in Table 3:
  • S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 4, and S-NSSAI 5 are used to identify network slice 1, network slice 2, network slice 3, network slice 4, and network slice 5 respectively.
  • the UE can select the PLMN with the highest priority as the VPLMN in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator according to the priority. As shown in Table 2, assuming that PLMN1 has the highest priority, the UE registers to PLMN1 as a VPLMN. However, regardless of the priority ordering among the PLMNs, the UE is only registered to one PLMN, so the UE cannot use network slice 1 and network slice 2 within one PLMN.
  • the network slices supported by different subnets (e.g., NPN) under the same PLMN may be the same or different, as shown in Figure 2.
  • the PLMN may be an HPLMN, or it may also be a VPLMN.
  • the PLMN includes sub-network 1 and sub-network 2 with overlapping coverage. Similar to Figure 1, the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 before moving, but after moving, subnet 1 only supports network slice 1, and subnet 2 only supports network slice 2. Regardless of whether the UE is registered to Subnet 1 or to Subnet 2, the UE cannot use Network Slice 1 and Network Slice 2 within one subnet.
  • the problem to be solved by the present invention is how to meet the requirements of the network slice that the UE expects to use.
  • the present application aims to provide a solution, so that the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 in the above scenario.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication systems or new radio (NR) systems, or applied to future communication systems or other similar communication systems.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • 5th generation, 5G mobile communication systems or new radio (NR) systems or applied to future communication systems or other similar communication systems.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • the system includes a service-oriented network architecture and a reference point-based network architecture.
  • the embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to other future-oriented communication technologies.
  • the present application can be applied to a roaming scenario (or a cross-PLMN scenario), or can also be applied to a scenario where multiple subnets (eg, NPN) are deployed in the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN).
  • a roaming scenario it can be applied to the network architecture of the communication system as shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
  • the present application is used in a scenario where multiple subnets are laid out in the same PLMN, it can be applied to the network architecture of the communication system as shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 .
  • roaming scenarios can be divided into local breakout roaming scenarios and home routed roaming scenarios.
  • Roaming scene the VPLMN and the HPLMN can communicate with each other through their respective security edge protection proxy (SEPP) service interfaces, so as to realize the functions of message filtering and topology hiding across the PLMN control plane interface.
  • SEPP security edge protection proxy
  • Service-based interface refers to the use of service-based interfaces within the control plane under a service-oriented architecture.
  • Namf is a service-based interface provided by AMF network elements, and AMF network elements can communicate with other network functions through Namf.
  • Nsmf is a service-based interface provided by SMF, and SMF can communicate with other network functions through Nsmf.
  • Nnssf is a service-based interface provided by NSSF network elements, and NSSF network elements can communicate with other network functions through Nnssf.
  • a functional network element can open its capabilities to authorized other functional network elements through a service-based interface, thereby providing network function (NF) services.
  • NF services refer to the various capabilities that can be provided.
  • the above network architecture may include three parts, namely terminal equipment, radio access network (RAN) and core network.
  • RAN radio access network
  • a terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function.
  • the terminal equipment is wirelessly connected to the access network equipment so as to be connected to the communication system.
  • a terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like.
  • the terminal equipment can be mobile phone, tablet computer, computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality terminal equipment, augmented reality terminal equipment, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in remote surgery, smart grid Wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in transportation security, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the terminal device may also be an on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units, and the vehicle passes the built-in on-board module, on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit.
  • a unit may implement the methods of the present application.
  • a node in the RAN may also be called an access network device or a base station, which is used to access the terminal device to the wireless network.
  • the access network device may be a base station (base station), an LTE system or an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB) in an LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), a next-generation base station in a 5G communication system (next generation NodeB, gNB), transmission reception point (TRP), base band unit (BBU), WiFi access point (access point, AP), base station or WiFi system in future mobile communication systems access node etc.
  • the radio access network device may also be a module or unit that completes some functions of the base station, for example, may be a centralized unit (central unit, CU) or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU).
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the wireless access network device.
  • the radio access network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or an access network device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU node is used to support radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP), service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) and other protocols;
  • DU node Used to support radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer protocol, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer protocol and physical layer protocol.
  • the core network network may include one or more of the following network elements: unified data management (UDM) network element, application function (AF) network element, access and mobility management function (access and mobility) management function, AMF) network element, session management function (session management function, SMF) network element, user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network element, and network slice selection function (network slice selection function, NSSF) network element, etc. .
  • the above network elements may also be referred to as devices, equipment or entities, which are not limited in this application.
  • UDM network elements may also be referred to as UDM devices, UDM equipment or UDM entities.
  • abbreviated manner will be used, for example, "UDM network element” is abbreviated as "UDM”, and “AMF network element” is abbreviated as "AMF”.
  • AMF is used to be responsible for user mobility management.
  • mobility management includes mobility status management, assigning user temporary identities, authenticating and authorizing users, etc.
  • SMF is used for selection and reselection of UPF, network protocol (IP) address allocation, protocol data unit (PDU) session establishment, modification or release, quality of service (quality of service, QoS) control Wait.
  • IP network protocol
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • QoS quality of service
  • the UDM is used to manage the subscription data, and to notify the corresponding network element when the subscription data is modified.
  • the AF is used to provide application layer services to the UE.
  • AF interacts with other control network elements of the 5G network, including providing QoS requirements, charging policy requirements, and routing policy requirements.
  • the SOR-AF is an AF used for the above-mentioned SOR technology, and the SOR-AF is connected to the UDM.
  • the UPF is interconnected with a data network (DN) for packet detection, routing and forwarding.
  • DN data network
  • the UPF can be used as an uplink classifier (ULCL) to support traffic offloading and then forwarded to the data network, or the UPF can be used as a branching point (BP) to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
  • ULCL uplink classifier
  • BP branching point
  • NSSF is used to be responsible for the selection of network slices.
  • the H-NSSF is deployed in the HPLMN, and the V-NSSF is deployed in the VPLMN.
  • a point-to-point interface or a service-oriented operation between the UDM and the H-NSSF can be added.
  • the above-mentioned network elements can be implemented by either specified hardware, or by a software instance on specified hardware, or by a virtual function instantiated on a suitable platform, which is not limited in the present invention. .
  • AMF, SMF, and NSSF in the following description refer to AMF, SMF, NSSF located within the NPN range in VPLMN, while UDM and SOR-AF refer to UDM and SOR-AF located in HPLMN, respectively.
  • AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR-AF are all AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR located in the current PLMN -AF.
  • functional network elements such as AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR-AF may be co-located or may be set separately, which does not affect the implementation of the method in this application.
  • pluricity refers to two or more than two, and in view of this, “plurality” may also be understood as “at least two” in the embodiments of the present application.
  • At least one can be understood as one or more, such as one, two or more. For example, including at least one means including one, two or more, and does not limit which ones are included. For example, if at least one of A, B, and C is included, then A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C may be included. Similarly, the understanding of descriptions such as “at least one" is similar.
  • FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are schematic structural diagrams of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus may be used to execute a method for registering with multiple networks. For ease of understanding, a method for registering with multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application will be described first.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic interactive flowchart of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Registering with multiple networks may be registering with multiple PLMNs, or may be registering with multiple subnets under one PLMN. The following description will be given by taking registration to multiple PLMNs as an example.
  • the method involves interaction between UE, AMF and UDM.
  • the UE may be the UE in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4
  • the AMF may be the AMF located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4
  • the UDM may be the AMF in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
  • the VPLMN may be any of the PLMNs in Table 3 above.
  • this method includes the following steps:
  • Step 901 the UE sends a registration request (registration request) message to the AMF.
  • the UE sends a registration request message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 9 ), and the RAN sends the registration request message to the AMF after receiving the registration request message.
  • the RAN may be the RAN located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
  • the AMF receives the registration request message from the UE through the RAN.
  • the registration request message includes information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be UE-requested NSSAI.
  • the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE requested NSSAI includes S-NSSAI 1 that identifies network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 that identifies network slice 2.
  • the registration request message may include the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
  • the registration request message may further include registration type information, for example, the registration type information may be used to indicate that the type of this registration is initial registration.
  • the registration request message may further include UE capability information, where the capability information indicates that the UE has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  • the capability information is specifically used to indicate that a subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) in the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • the UE sends the UE capability information to the network through a registration request message, and the UE capability information can be implemented by one bit.
  • the capability information has a first value (for example, 1), it indicates that the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs;
  • the capability information has a second value (eg, 0)
  • the UE when the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs, the UE sends the UE capability information to the network through a registration request message; when the UE does not have the ability to register with multiple PLMNs, the UE does not send the UE capability information.
  • the AMF After the AMF receives the registration request message, it executes the corresponding steps in the registration process. For example, if the AMF does not have the subscription information of the UE, the AMF invokes the servitization operation of acquiring the subscription information from the UDM, so as to obtain the subscription information of the UE.
  • Step 902 the AMF sends a request message a to the UDM.
  • the request message a may include the information in the above registration request message.
  • the request message a may include information about multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, such as S-NSSAI 1 identifying network slice 1 and S-NSSAI identifying network slice 2 - NSSAI 2.
  • the UDM receives the request message a from the AMF.
  • the AMF may send the request message a to the UDM by invoking the service operation of the UDM.
  • the UDM after receiving the request message a, the UDM first determines that the current PLMN cannot support all the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the current PLMN is PLMN 1.
  • PLMN 1 supports network slice 1 identified by S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 identified by S-NSSAI 3, but cannot support network slice 2 identified by S-NSSAI 1 , thus triggering the UDM to execute the following step 903 .
  • Step 903 the UDM determines the network set.
  • the network set may be one network set, or may also be multiple network sets. Wherein, each network set includes multiple PLMNs, and each network slice that the UE requests to access is supported by at least one PLMN among the multiple PLMNs.
  • each network set includes at least two PLMNs, one of which supports network slice 1 and the other PLMN supports network slice 2.
  • the network set may include one or more of: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN2 and PLMN3 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN3 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the PLMNs in ⁇ represent multiple PLMNs in a network set.
  • the network set may include ⁇ PLMN1 and (PLMN2, PLMN5) ⁇ , and the PLMNs in ( ) are PLMNs that support the same network slice.
  • the first network set is the highest priority network set.
  • ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ are a network set with the highest priority, followed by ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , and so on.
  • the UDM may acquire SOR information through SOR-AF, where the SOR information includes the information of the foregoing network set, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 below.
  • the UDM may determine the network set according to information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the UDM is configured with the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement, or the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF (for example, the NSSF located in the HPLMN), and then according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement
  • the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN and the subscription information of the UE determine the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access.
  • the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access may be as described in Table 3 above.
  • the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF located in the HPLMN, it means that the interface or service operation between the UDM and the NSSF should be added in the existing network architecture.
  • the UDM determines the network set according to the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access and the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN.
  • the UDM may determine the network set according to the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN, and the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
  • the request message a in step 902 also carries the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE, according to which the UDM learns the PLMN currently registered by the UE, and thus selects a network set including the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
  • the network set may include one or more of: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ and ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the UDM when the request message a contains UE capability information, the UDM has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the network set.
  • the above registration request message and request message a may not include UE capability information, and the UDM may default that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, and then performs the following operations.
  • the UDM may also generate the SOR information including the foregoing network set according to the foregoing manner.
  • the form of the SOR information can also refer to the specific description of FIG. 10 later.
  • the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access considered in the above steps is the S-NSSAI included in the UE's subscription S-NSSAI. That is to say, regardless of whether the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access is determined to be the S-NSSAI that allows access in the current PLMN, at least the S-NSSAI of the UE's subscription includes this S-NSSAI, or in other words, the S-NSSAI Network slices corresponding to NSSAI may be registered in other PLMNs. Otherwise, it is not necessary for the network side to consider the PLMN to which this S-NSSAI can be registered. In other words, the network equipment does not need to determine the PLMN for the S-NSSAI for which the UE requests access which is not included in the subscription S-NSSAI.
  • Step 904 the UDM sends a response message b to the AMF, where the response message b includes the information associated with the above network set.
  • the AMF receives a response message b from the UDM, where the response message b includes information associated with the aforementioned network set.
  • the UDM can send information associated with this network set through the response message b in step 904.
  • the UDM can send the information of the multiple network sets through the response message b in step 904, or the UDM can use at least one of the priority of each network set and the PLMN currently registered by the UE. item to send information about some network sets in multiple network sets.
  • the UDM may send information of a network set with the highest priority among multiple network sets, or send information including one or more network sets in which the UE is currently registered with the PLMN.
  • the UDM may also determine the information associated with the network set according to the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
  • the information associated with the network set may only include the PLMN to which the UE is to be additionally registered, but not the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered.
  • the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1
  • the network set may include: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , then the information associated with the network set may only include the information of PLMN2.
  • the UDM also sends indication information to the AMF, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • the UDM may send the above-mentioned information and indication information associated with the network set to the AMF through the response message b in step 904 .
  • the UDM can send the above information to the AMF by invoking the service operation of the AMF.
  • Step 905 the AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the UE, where the registration acceptance message includes the above-mentioned information associated with the network set.
  • the registration acceptance message further includes the above indication information.
  • the registration acceptance message further includes at least one of allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI.
  • the message sent by the AMF to the UE in step 905 may be a registration rejection message (not shown in the figure), and the registration rejection message includes the above-mentioned information associated with the network set.
  • the allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI may be as described in Table 4.
  • NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 2 PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2 S-NSSAI 1 PLMN3 S-NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 2 PLMN4 null S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 2 PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2 S-NSSAI 1
  • the AMF sends a registration accept message/registration rejection message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 9 ), and the RAN sends the registration accept message/registration rejection message to the UE after receiving the registration accept message.
  • the UE receives the Registration Accept message/Registration Reject message from the AMF through the RAN.
  • Step 906 the UE registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
  • registering with multiple PLMNs in this application may be understood as “registering with multiple PLMNs at the same time", for example, simultaneously registering with multiple PLMNs in the network set. "Concurrently” does not necessarily mean that the UE needs to perform the action of registering with multiple PLMNs at the same time.
  • the UE can first register with the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs, and then register with the second PLMN among the multiple PLMNs, and when the UE registers When arriving at the second PLMN, the UE remains registered in the first PLMN. That is, the UE remains registered in multiple PLMNs.
  • the UE may register with the PLMN in the network set accordingly. It should be noted that, if the UE has already registered with the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs through the registration process of the above steps 901 to 905, the UE only needs to additionally register with other PLMNs except the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs; otherwise, the UE Additional registrations to these multiple PLMNs are possible.
  • the information associated with the network set received by the UE is ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , and the UE has already registered with PLMN1 through the registration process of steps 901 to 905, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
  • the UE may first determine a network set (referred to as the first network set) from the multiple network sets. For example, the UE may randomly determine a network set from multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine a network set containing The network set of registered PLMNs is used as the first network set, or the UE may determine the first network set by combining the priority of each network set and the network set of registered PLMNs.
  • the first network set referred to as the first network set
  • the UE may randomly determine a network set from multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine a network set containing The network set of registered PLMNs is used as the first network set, or the UE may determine the first network set by combining the priority of each network set and the network set of registered PLMNs.
  • the information associated with the network set received by the UE includes ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN2 and PLMN3 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN3 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the UE may select the first set of networks according to any of the above methods, eg ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ .
  • the UE may register with the PLMN in the first network set accordingly.
  • the UE may register with the PLMN in the first network set accordingly. For how the UE operates, reference may be made to the description in the previous implementation manner, which will not be repeated here.
  • the UE when the UE receives the information associated with multiple network sets in step 905, only the information that the UE is to be registered to the PLMN is included, that is, the information received by the UE in step 905 is the same as that of the multiple network sets.
  • the information associated with each network set already does not include the network to which the UE has registered, so the UE may additionally register with the PLMN in the information.
  • the UE eventually registers with multiple PLMNs capable of supporting multiple network slices requested by the UE. After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the multiple requested network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to. For example, when the UE wants to use the service provided by the network slice 2, a session corresponding to the network slice 2 is established, and then the UE accesses the network slice 2 through the session.
  • the UE can register to multiple PLMNs according to the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, so that the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access can be used in the combination of multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements that the UE expects to use.
  • the demand for network slicing provides better services for users and improves user experience.
  • the method can also be applied to scenarios of multiple subnets within the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN).
  • the method in this scenario also involves the interaction between UE, AMF and UDM.
  • the UE may be the UE in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6
  • the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6
  • the UDM may be the UDM in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 .
  • the UDM may determine one or more network sets, where each network set includes multiple subnets, and multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are supported by at least one of the multiple subnets, then, when the UE receives After obtaining the information associated with the network set, you can register to multiple subnets, and use the multiple network slices requested for access through the multiple subnets registered to. In this way, multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination of multiple subnets, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
  • the information associated with the network set can be implemented by means of SOR information, wherein the SOR information can either be generated by the UDM, or can also be requested by the UDM for SOR- AF generation.
  • FIG. 10 will be described by taking the UDM requesting the SOR-AF to generate the SOR information as an example.
  • FIG. 10 will be described in conjunction with FIG. 9 .
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • Step 1001 the UDM sends the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access to the SOR-AF.
  • the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, which is included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
  • the UDM determines to obtain the SOR information, and then executes the above-mentioned step 1001 .
  • the UDM may also send UE capability information to the SOR-AF.
  • the UE capability information may be the UE capability information included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
  • the UDM may also send the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE to the SOR-AF.
  • the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE may be the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
  • Step 1002 the SOR-AF generates SOR information according to information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the SOR information may indicate a network set.
  • the network set may refer to the description of step 903 in FIG. 9 .
  • the SOR-AF configures the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement; or, the SOR-AF obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF. Then, the SOR-AF determines the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the UE, and then according to the information and information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN generates SOR information.
  • the SOR information may include one or more network sets, wherein each network set includes multiple PLMNs, and each network slice that the UE requests to access is supported by at least one PLMN among the multiple PLMNs.
  • each network set includes at least two PLMNs, one of which supports network slice 1 and the other PLMN supports network slice 2.
  • the SOR information may include one or more of: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN2 and PLMN3 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN3 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the PLMNs in ⁇ represent multiple PLMNs in a network set.
  • the network set may include ⁇ PLMN1 and (PLMN2, PLMN5) ⁇ , and the PLMNs in ( ) are PLMNs that support the same network slice.
  • the network set ranked first in the SOR information is the network set with the highest priority.
  • ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ are a network set with the highest priority, followed by ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , and so on.
  • the SOR-AF may determine the SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN, and the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE. For example, the SOR-AF may select the network set including the PLMN with which the UE is currently registered as the network set in the SOR information. For example, if the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1, the SOR information may include one or more of: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ and ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the SOR-AF may determine that the UE has the capability to access multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the SOR information.
  • the SOR-AF may generate SOR information by defaulting that the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • Step 1003 the SOR-AF sends the above SOR information to the UDM.
  • the SOR-AF also sends indication information to the UDM, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • the UDM receives the SOR information from the SOR-AF, determines the network set according to the SOR information, and then executes step 904 in FIG. That is, the registration acceptance message in step 905 includes SOR information. After receiving the SOR information, the UE registers to at least one of the multiple networks through step 906 .
  • the registration of the UE to at least one of the multiple networks according to the SOR information may be implemented in the following manner:
  • the UE assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information including the foregoing network set information. Then, the UE performs PLMN selection according to the above selector and registers with multiple PLMNs.
  • the UE when the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information, the UE can select and register the PLMN according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector. Alternatively, the UE may assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information.
  • the SOR information is used to update the user-controlled PLMN selector, the UE provides the SOR information in a user-readable form to the user (eg, displayed to the user), and the user then selects the PLMN to register to.
  • the UE may display the correspondence between each PLMN and the network slices supported by each on the user interface, and the user may select according to his/her own preference.
  • the UE After receiving the instruction of which PLMNs to be registered selected by the user, the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the user. For example, if the user selects PLMN1 and PLMN2 according to the information provided by the UE, the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the user to PLMN1 and PLMN2. When the UE uses the user-controlled PLMN selector, it can register to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In addition, if the current UE has already registered with PLMN1, it only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. The principles of how the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector and the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information are similar. The following will take the UE updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information as an example for description.
  • the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and the UE registers with the PLMN in the network set according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector.
  • the SOR information includes information for a network set.
  • the network set includes PLMN1 and PLMN2
  • the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 5. The UE can register to PLMN1 and PLMN2 according to the above method.
  • the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and the UE selects a network set and registers according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector.
  • the at least two network sets in the SOR information include: ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN2 and PLMN3 ⁇ , ⁇ PLMN3 and PLMN5 ⁇ .
  • the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 6.
  • PLMN selector ⁇ PLMN1, PLMN2 ⁇ ⁇ PLMN1, PLMN5 ⁇ ⁇ PLMN2, PLMN3 ⁇ ⁇ PLMN3, PLMN5 ⁇
  • the UE randomly selects a network set, for example, the UE selects a PLMN in the first network set and registers. That is, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2 and register.
  • the UE may select a network set considering the currently registered PLMN, that is, select a network set including the currently registered PLMN. For example, if the UE has already registered to PLMN1 through the above registration process, the UE can select ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ or ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN5 ⁇ , that is, the UE can additionally register to PLMN2 or PLMN5.
  • the network sets in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator are arranged in descending order of priority.
  • the UE registers with the network set with the highest priority.
  • ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ are a network set with the highest priority. Therefore, the UE registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
  • the UE may select a network set with the highest priority that includes the PLMN currently registered to in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator. For example, if the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, ⁇ PLMN1 and PLMN2 ⁇ are the operators.
  • the controlled PLMN selector includes a network set with the highest priority of the currently registered PLMN, and the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2.
  • the UE when the SOR information is in the form of a security package, the UE first decapsulates the security package, and then selects and registers with the PLMN according to any of the above methods, which will not be repeated here.
  • the UE After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the multiple requested network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to.
  • the UE can assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information.
  • the UE selects the PLMN to be accessed according to the updated selector, it has the opportunity to register to multiple PLMNs, so that multiple network slices that the UE requests to access have the opportunity to be used in the combination of multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices that the UE expects to use, provide better services for users, and improve the user experience.
  • the UDM may update the SOR information again, and deliver the updated SOR information to the UE again, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another process interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks provided by the present application. This schematic will be described in conjunction with FIGS. 9 and 10 .
  • Figure 11 relates to the interaction between network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the network device may be the UDM in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10
  • the terminal device may be the UE in FIG. 9 .
  • the interaction may also involve an AMF, and the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 9 .
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1101 The terminal device sends information of multiple network slices to which access is requested to the network device.
  • the network device receives from the terminal device information of multiple network slices that are requested to be accessed.
  • the network device may be a UDM.
  • the UDM may receive the information of the multiple network slices that are requested to be accessed from the terminal device through the AMF.
  • the information of multiple network slices to which access is requested may be the terminal device requested NSSAI.
  • the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the NSSAI requested by the terminal device includes S-NSSAI 1 of network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 of network slice 2.
  • the information of the multiple network slices for which access is requested reference may be made to the description in step 901 in FIG. 9 .
  • the terminal device sends the terminal device capability information to the network device.
  • the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  • the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM card in the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the terminal device capability information reference may be made to the description in step 901 in FIG. 9 .
  • step 1101 For other details of step 1101, reference may be made to the descriptions in step 901 and step 902 in FIG. 9 .
  • Step 1102 the network device determines a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices according to the information of the plurality of network slices for which access is requested, wherein each network slice in the plurality of network slices is Supported by at least one of the multiple networks.
  • multiple networks may refer to multiple PLMNs.
  • the multiple networks may refer to multiple subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnets may refer to a non-public network NPN.
  • the multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN.
  • the determination by the network device of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices may include the following situations:
  • the network device determines a network set, the network set includes the above-mentioned multiple networks, and each network slice in the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access is replaced by a network slice in the multiple networks in the network set.
  • the network set includes multiple networks that respectively support multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the one network set includes a first network and a second network, wherein the first network supports network slice 1 and the second network supports network slice 2.
  • the network device determines multiple network sets, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access is replaced by a network slice in the multiple networks in each of the multiple network sets.
  • each of the multiple network sets includes multiple networks that respectively support multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network device determines a plurality of network sets, wherein a first network set of the plurality of network sets includes a first network and a second network.
  • the first network set has the highest priority among the multiple network sets.
  • the network set may indicate other networks except the network to which the terminal device has been registered, that is, the network to which the current terminal device has been registered may not be included.
  • the network set indicates information excluding other networks except the first network.
  • the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device sends information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus; the network The device receives the roaming preference SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network device determines a plurality of networks according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus determines multiple networks according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds it back to the network device by means of SOR information.
  • this embodiment can be applied to the roaming scenario described above. Details of this embodiment can be referred to the description of FIG. 10 .
  • the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, where the corresponding information is used to indicate the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • the network slice supported by each network in the registered network the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices according to the corresponding information and the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network device may first obtain the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with a roaming agreement from the NSSF or locally configured information, and determine the above correspondence according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with a roaming agreement and the subscription information of the terminal device.
  • the network device acquires the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then the network device obtains information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access according to the information to determine a plurality of networks, each of the plurality of network slices being supported by at least one of the plurality of networks.
  • the network device acquires the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then the network device obtains information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access according to the information to determine a plurality of networks, each of the plurality of network slices being supported by at least one of the plurality of networks.
  • step 1102 For other details of step 1102, reference may be made to the description in step 903 in FIG. 9 .
  • Step 1103 the network device sends a plurality of network associated information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the plurality of network associated information from the network device.
  • step 904 in FIG. 9 For information related to multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of step 904 in FIG. 9 .
  • the UDM network device may send SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the information associated with the multiple networks.
  • the UDM sends multiple network associated information to the terminal device through the AMF, and the terminal device receives multiple network associated information from the UDM through the AMF.
  • the network device after the network device determines multiple networks, the network device first determines the information associated with the multiple networks, and then sends the information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device.
  • the information associated with the plurality of networks indicates the plurality of networks.
  • the information associated with the multiple networks includes information of at least one network in the multiple networks except the first network. That is, the information associated with the multiple networks may not include the network to which the terminal device is currently registered.
  • the network device may determine one or more network sets, therefore, in step 1103, the network device may send information associated with the one or more network sets to the terminal device, wherein each network set indicates multiple At least one network in the network or multiple networks except the first network currently registered by the terminal device.
  • step 904 in FIG. 9 For other details of the information associated with multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of step 904 in FIG. 9 .
  • the network device further sends, to the terminal device, indication information indicating that the terminal device is registered with multiple networks.
  • the multiple networks in the indication information may refer to multiple networks in general.
  • step 1103 For other details of step 1103, reference may be made to the descriptions in steps 904 to 905 in FIG. 9 .
  • Step 1104 The terminal device registers with at least one network among the multiple networks according to the information associated with the multiple networks.
  • Registering to at least one of the multiple networks means: if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks except the first network at least one network; or, the terminal device registers with the multiple networks.
  • the information associated with a plurality of networks indicates the above-mentioned first network and second network.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device has been registered to the first network through the above steps, the terminal device re-registers to the second network according to the received information associated with multiple networks. Otherwise, the terminal device registers with the first network and the second network according to the information of the multiple networks.
  • this step includes the following situations:
  • the terminal device when the multiple network information includes information of one network set, the one network set includes the first network and the second network, and the terminal device registers with one network set in the network.
  • the terminal device selects one of the multiple network sets according to the multiple network information and registers with the network set For example, the terminal device selects a first network set among multiple network sets and registers with the network in the first network set, where the first network set includes the first network and the second network.
  • the first network set is the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets, that is, the terminal device registers with the network in the network set with the highest priority.
  • the above description can be applied to the case where the terminal device directly registers with the multiple networks according to the received information of the multiple networks.
  • the above description can also be applied to the case where the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information.
  • the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and then registers with the at least one of the networks.
  • the terminal device prompts the user with third information according to the plurality of network information, and the third information is used to indicate The user selects multiple networks; the terminal device receives an instruction from the user, and registers with the multiple networks according to the instruction.
  • step 1104 For other details of step 1104, reference may be made to the description of step 906 in FIG. 9 .
  • the network device determines multiple networks capable of supporting multiple network slices requested for access, and sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can register with the multiple networks, and the terminal device can register with the multiple networks. It uses multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the terminal device, better provide services to users, and improve user experience.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks provided by this application.
  • Registering with multiple networks may be registering with multiple PLMNs, or may be registering with multiple subnets under one PLMN. The following description will be given by taking registration to multiple PLMNs as an example.
  • the method involves interaction between UE, AMF and UDM.
  • the UE may be the UE in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4
  • the AMF may be the AMF located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4
  • the UDM may be the HPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
  • UDM may be any of the PLMNs in Table 3 above.
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1201 the UE sends a registration request (registration request) message to the AMF.
  • the UE sends a registration request message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 12 ), and the RAN sends the registration request message to the AMF after receiving the registration request message.
  • the RAN may be the RAN located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
  • the AMF receives the registration request message from the UE through the RAN.
  • the registration request message may include UE capability information, where the capability information indicates that the UE has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  • the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM in the UE has the capability to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • the capability information reference may be made to the description of step 901 in FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here.
  • the registration request message may include information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be UE-requested NSSAI.
  • the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE requested NSSAI includes S-NSSAI 1 that identifies network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 that identifies network slice 2.
  • S-NSSAI 1 that identifies network slice 1
  • S-NSSAI 2 that identifies network slice 2.
  • the registration request message may include the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
  • the registration request message may further include registration type information, where the registration type information is used to indicate that the type of this registration is initial registration.
  • the AMF After the AMF receives the registration request message, it executes the corresponding steps in the registration process. For example, if the AMF does not have the subscription information of the UE, the AMF invokes the servitization operation of acquiring the subscription information from the UDM, so as to obtain the subscription information of the UE.
  • Step 1202 the AMF sends a request message c to the UDM.
  • the request message c may include the information in the above-mentioned registration request message, for example, the request message c may include UE capability information, the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access or the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE. at least one of.
  • the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are S-NSSAI 1 identifying network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 identifying network slice 2.
  • the UDM receives the request message c from the AMF.
  • the AMF may send the request message c to the UDM by invoking the service operation of the UDM.
  • the UDM after receiving the request message c, the UDM first determines that the current PLMN cannot support all the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the current PLMN is PLMN 1.
  • PLMN 1 supports network slice 1 identified by S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 identified by S-NSSAI 3, but cannot support network slice 2 identified by S-NSSAI 1 , thus triggering the UDM to execute the following step 1203 .
  • Step 1203 the UDM obtains the network set and information of network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the UDM can determine the network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set, or the UDM can obtain the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the SOR-AF.
  • the method for the UDM to obtain the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the SOR-AF will be described in detail with reference to the following Figure 13 , and this implementation is applicable to the cross-PLMN roaming scenario.
  • the information about the network set and the network slice supported by each network in the network set may be the association information of the PLMN in the network set and the network slice supported by each PLMN.
  • the PLMN in the network set is a PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register.
  • the PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register refers to the PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register at the same time. That is, the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set may be in the form of a table, as shown in Table 3 above.
  • the network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set may include: PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3), PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4) NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN4 (S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5), PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5).
  • PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3
  • PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4
  • PLMN3 S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4
  • NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 4
  • PLMN4 S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5
  • PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5
  • the PLMN in the network set is at least one network that supports the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. Sliced PLMN. That is to say, a PLMN that does not support at least one of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access is not included in the network set.
  • the PLMN 4 in Table 3 can neither support the network slice 1 that the UE requests to access, nor the network slice 2 that the UE requests to access.
  • the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set may be in the form of a table, as shown in Table 7.
  • the network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set may include: PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3), PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4) NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5).
  • the UDM is configured with the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement, or the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF (for example, the NSSF located in the HPLMN), and then according to the PLMN with the roaming agreement.
  • the supported S-NSSAI and the UE's subscription information determine the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access.
  • the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access may be as described in Table 3 above.
  • the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF located in the HPLMN, it means that the interface or service operation between the UDM and the NSSF should be added in the existing network architecture.
  • the UDM can determine the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set according to the request message c.
  • the UDM when the request message c includes UE capability information, the UDM has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the above registration request message and request message c may not include UE capability information, and the UDM may default that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, and then performs the following operations.
  • the UDM determines the difference between the multiple networks in the network set determined by the UDM and the network slice that the UE requests to access according to the information about the network slice that the UE requests to access.
  • Information association For this, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the UDM can learn the PLMN currently registered by the UE accordingly, so as to select the network set including the PLMN currently registered by the UE and the network slice supported by each PLMN in the network set .
  • the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1
  • the network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set include PLMN2, PLMN3, PLMN4, PLMN5 and the information of the corresponding supported network slices.
  • the UDM may also generate the SOR information including the foregoing network set according to the foregoing manner.
  • the form of the SOR information can also refer to the specific description of FIG. 13 later.
  • the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access considered in the above steps is the S-NSSAI included in the UE's subscription S-NSSAI. That is to say, regardless of whether the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access is determined to be the S-NSSAI that allows access in the current PLMN, at least the S-NSSAI of the UE's subscription includes this S-NSSAI, or in other words, the S-NSSAI Network slices corresponding to NSSAI may be registered in other PLMNs. Otherwise, it is not necessary for the network side to consider the PLMN to which this S-NSSAI can be registered. In other words, the network equipment does not need to determine the PLMN for the S-NSSAI for which the UE requests access which is not included in the subscription S-NSSAI.
  • Step 1204 the UDM sends a response message d to the AMF, where the response message d includes the network set in step 1203 and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the AMF receives the response message d from the UDM.
  • the UDM may send the network set to which the UE is allowed to register and the information of network slices supported by each network in the network set through the response message d of step 1204. That is, the networks in the network set are the networks to which the UE is allowed to register.
  • the UDM may send, through the response message d in step 1204, a network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and a network supported by each network in the network set slice information. That is to say, each network in the network set can support at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and the UDM sends each network slice (including but not limited to the network slices supported by the network) through a response message. The network slice that the UE requests to access). Further optionally, the network set sent by the UDM does not include the information of the network currently registered by the UE.
  • the UDM also sends indication information to the AMF, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • the UDM may send the above-mentioned information and indication information related to the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set to the AMF through the response message d in step 1204 .
  • the UDM can send the above information to the AMF by invoking the service operation of the AMF.
  • Step 1205 the AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the UE, where the registration acceptance message includes the above network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the registration acceptance message further includes the above indication information.
  • the registration acceptance message further includes at least one of allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI.
  • the message sent by the AMF to the UE in step 905 may be a registration rejection message (not shown in the figure), and the registration rejection message includes the above network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set. Except that the content contained in the message is the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, other details of this step may refer to the description of step 905 in FIG. 9 .
  • the AMF sends a registration accept message/registration rejection message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 12 ), and the RAN sends the registration accept message/registration rejection message to the UE after receiving the registration accept message.
  • the UE receives the Registration Accept message/Registration Reject message from the AMF through the RAN.
  • Step 1206 the UE selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE.
  • the UE when the UE receives the network set that the UE is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network set through step 1205, the UE can access the network slices according to the information of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE.
  • the information and the information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set are received, and multiple PLMNs that support each of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are selected.
  • the network set received by the UE and the network slice information supported by each network in the network set are shown in Table 3 above.
  • the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2.
  • the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or PLMN1 and PLMN5, or PLMN2 and PLMN3, or PLMN3 and PLMN3. PLMN5.
  • the UE when the UE receives, in step 1205, a network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and information about network slices supported by each network in the network set, the UE Multiple PLMNs supporting each of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE may be selected according to the information of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE.
  • the network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network set received by the UE, the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are: For network slice 1 and network slice 2, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or PLMN1 and PLMN5, or PLMN2 and PLMN3, or PLMN3 and PLMN5.
  • the operation of the UE is similar. In other words, the UE may not perceive whether a network in the received network set can support at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • Step 1207 the UE registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
  • the UE registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE selected in step 1206 .
  • the UE if the UE has already registered to the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs through the registration process of the above steps 1201 to 1205, the UE only needs to additionally register to other PLMNs except the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs; otherwise, the UE can Additional registration to these multiple PLMNs.
  • the UE chooses to register with PLMN1 and PLMN2, if the UE is currently registered with PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered with PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN1 . If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
  • the UE eventually registers with multiple PLMNs capable of supporting multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE. After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the requested multiple network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to. For example, when the UE wants to use the service provided by the network slice 2, a session corresponding to the network slice 2 is established, and then the network slice 2 is accessed through the session.
  • the UE can register with multiple PLMNs according to the multiple network slices to be accessed, so that the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination with multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements that the UE expects to use.
  • the demand for network slicing provides better services for users and improves user experience.
  • the method can also be applied to scenarios of multiple subnets within the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN).
  • the method in this scenario also involves the interaction between UE, AMF and UDM.
  • the UE may be the UE in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6
  • the AMF may be the AMF located in the NPN in FIG. 5
  • the UDM may be the UDM in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 .
  • the UDM can obtain information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, where the network set includes multiple subnets, and the information on the network slices supported by each network in the network set is the information supported by the multiple subnets. Information about network slices.
  • the network set here may include the identification of multiple subnets (eg, NPNs).
  • the network set may further include an identifier of the PLMN corresponding to each subnet.
  • the UDM can obtain the correspondence between each subnet ID and the S-NSSAI supported by the subnet, or the relationship between each subnet ID and the PLMN where the subnet is located and the S-NSSAI supported by the subnet.
  • the UE After receiving the information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, the UE selects multiple subnets that support multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE, and registers with the multiple subnets.
  • a subnet uses multiple network slices to be accessed. In this way, multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination with multiple subnets, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
  • the network set and the network slice information supported by each network in the network set can be implemented by means of SOR information, wherein the SOR information can either be generated by UDM, or, SOR-AF generation can also be requested by UDM.
  • FIG. 13 will be described by taking the UDM requesting the SOR-AF to generate SOR information as an example.
  • FIG. 13 will be described in conjunction with FIG. 12 .
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • Step 1301 the UDM sends a request message e to the SOR-AF.
  • the request message e may be the information included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
  • the UDM determines to obtain the SOR information, and then executes the above-mentioned step 1301.
  • the UDM may send the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access to the SOR-AF through the request message e.
  • the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, which is included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
  • the UDM may send the UE capability information to the SOR-AF through the request message e.
  • the UE capability information may be the UE capability information included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
  • the UDM can also send the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE to the SOR-AF through the request message e.
  • the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE may be the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
  • Step 1302 the SOR-AF generates SOR information according to the information in the request message e, where the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the SOR-AF configures the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement; or, the SOR-AF obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF. Then, the SOR-AF determines the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that allows the UE to access according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the UE, and then generates SOR information according to the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN.
  • SOR information can have any of the following forms:
  • the SOR information includes the set of networks that the UE is allowed to register with and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the set of networks, as shown in Table 3 above.
  • PLMN1, PLMN2, PLMN3, PLMN4 and PLMN5 in Table 3 are all PLMNs that the UE can register with, and the UE is allowed to register with any two or more PLMNs among the five PLMNs. For example, when the UE registers with PLMN1 and PLMN2, the UE can use the network slices S-NSSAI 1 and S-NSSAI 3 supported by PLMN1, and the network slices S-NSSAI 2 and S-NSSAI 4 supported by PLMN2.
  • the generation of the SOR information may not consider multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
  • the request message e in the foregoing step 1301 may not carry the multiple network slice information that the UE requests to access.
  • the SOR information includes a set of networks that the UE is allowed to register with and a network slice supported by each network in the network set, and each network in the network set supports at least one network slice that the UE requests to access.
  • the generation of the SOR information further considers the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. That is to say, the SOR-AF can filter out the PLMN that can support at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access according to the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and only provide this PLMN and the network supported by the PLMN. Slice associated information. Taking the above example as an example, the PLMN 4 in Table 3 can neither support the network slice 1 that the UE requests to access, nor the network slice 2 that the UE requests to access. Therefore, the SOR information can be as shown in Table 7 above.
  • the request message e carries the UE capability information
  • the SOR-AF may determine that the UE has the capability to access multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the SOR information.
  • the request message e may not carry the UE capability information, and the SOR-AF defaults that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, thereby generating the SOR information.
  • Step 1303 the SOR-AF sends the above SOR information to the UDM.
  • the SOR-AF also sends indication information to the UDM, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
  • the UDM receives the SOR information from the SOR-AF, determines the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set according to the SOR information, and then executes step 1204 in FIG. 1205 Send the UE the network set and information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the UE selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE through step 1206 , and registers with at least one of the multiple networks through step 1207 .
  • selecting multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE according to the SOR information may be implemented in the following manner:
  • the UE assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information. Then, the UE performs PLMN selection according to the above selector.
  • the principles of how the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector and the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information are similar. The following will take the UE updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information as an example for description.
  • the SOR information has the first form described in step 1302, that is, the SOR information includes the network set that the UE is allowed to register with and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set, as shown in Table 3 above
  • the UE according to The SOR information updates the PLMN selector controlled by the operator, and the UE selects multiple PLMNs according to the updated PLMN selector controlled by the operator and the information of multiple network slices to be accessed.
  • the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 8.
  • PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3) indicates that PLMN1 supports network slice 1 corresponding to S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 corresponding to S-NSSAI 3.
  • PLMN1 Operator controlled PLMN selector PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3)
  • PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4)
  • PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4)
  • PLMN4 (S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5)
  • PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5)
  • the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2.
  • the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or can also select PLMN1 and PLMN5, or can also select PLMN2 and PLMN3, or can also select PLMN3 and PLMN5.
  • PLMN1 and PLMN2 if the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2.
  • the UE if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1.
  • the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
  • the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority.
  • the UE may select multiple PLMNs with relatively highest priorities according to multiple network slices to be accessed, that is, select PLMN1 and PLMN2.
  • the UE may also select multiple PLMNs in consideration of the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered, that is, to select multiple PLMNs including the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered. For example, if the slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE has registered to PLMN1 through the above registration process, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2 or select PLMN1 and PLMN5, that is, the UE can Additional registration to PLMN2 or PLMN5.
  • the UE may also select the PLMN considering multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE, the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered, and the priority in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator. For example, the UE may select PLMN1 and PLMN2.
  • the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the operator according to the SOR information, and the UE selects multiple PLMN selectors according to the updated PLMN selector controlled by the operator PLMN.
  • the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 9.
  • PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3
  • PLMN1 indicates that PLMN1 supports network slice 1 corresponding to S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 corresponding to S-NSSAI 3.
  • PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3
  • PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4
  • PLMN3 S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4
  • PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5
  • the UE may select a PLMN in combination with Table 4 and Table 9 above.
  • the S-NSSAI 1 corresponding to network slice 1 to be accessed by the UE has been included in the allowed NSSAI, indicating that the UE can use network slice 1 in PLMN1, but the UE is to access network slice 1.
  • the S-NSSAI 2 corresponding to the network slice 2 is included in the rejected NSSAI, indicating that the UE can not use the network slice 2 in the PLMN1.
  • the UE further selects a PLMN for network slice 2, that is, selects a PLMN that supports network slice 2.
  • PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2, so the UE can choose PLMN2 or PLMN5 to register.
  • the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE can select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to register with PLMN2.
  • the operations of the UE are similar, which will not be repeated here.
  • the S-NSSAI 1 corresponding to network slice 1 and the S-NSSAI 2 corresponding to network slice 2 that the UE requests to access are included in the rejected NSSAI, indicating that the UE can not be used in PLMN4 Network Slice 1 and Network Slice 2.
  • the UE selects a PLMN for network slice 1 and a PLMN for network slice 2.
  • PLMN1 and PLMN3 support network slice 1
  • PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2
  • the UE can select one PLMN from PLMN1 and PLMN3, and one PLMN from PLMN2 and PLMN5.
  • the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE may select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to register with PLMN1 and PLMN2.
  • the UE may directly select the PLMN according to Table 9. For example, when the above registration process is performed in PLMN1, since PLMN1 supports network slice 1, network slice 2 is not supported. Then, the UE further selects a PLMN for network slice 2, that is, selects a PLMN that supports network slice 2. It can be seen from Table 9 that PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2, so the UE can choose to register with PLMN2 or PLMN5.
  • the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE may select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to re-register to PLMN2. When the above registration process is performed in other PLMNs, the operations of the UE are similar, and are not repeated here.
  • the UE when the SOR information is in the form of a security package, the UE first decapsulates the security package, and then selects and registers with the PLMN according to any of the above methods, which will not be repeated here.
  • the UE After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the desired multiple network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to.
  • the UE can assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information.
  • the UE selects a PLMN according to the updated selector, it has the opportunity to register with multiple PLMNs. This enables multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE to have the opportunity to be used in combination with multiple PLMNs, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
  • the UDM may update the SOR information again, and deliver the updated SOR information to the UE again, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks provided by the present application. This schematic will be described in conjunction with the steps in FIGS. 12 and 13 .
  • Figure 14 relates to the interaction between the network device and the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may be the UE in FIG. 12
  • the network device may be the UDM in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 .
  • the interaction may also involve an AMF, and the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 12 .
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1401 the terminal device sends a registration request message to the network device.
  • the network device receives the registration request message from the terminal device.
  • the network device may be a UDM.
  • the UDM may receive the above-mentioned registration request message from the terminal device through the AMF.
  • the registration request message may include information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device, and the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed may be NSSAI requested by the terminal device.
  • the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the NSSAI requested by the terminal device includes S-NSSAI 1 of network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 of network slice 2.
  • the information of the multiple network slices for which access is requested reference may be made to the description in step 1201 in FIG. 12 .
  • the registration request message may include terminal device capability information.
  • the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  • the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM card in the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
  • the terminal device capability information reference may be made to the description in step 1201 in FIG. 12 .
  • step 1401 For other details of step 1401, reference may be made to the descriptions in step 1201 and step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
  • Step 1402 The network device determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate a network set and a network slice supported by each network in the network set.
  • the first information includes association information between each network and network slices supported by each network.
  • the first information may be in the form of a list, as shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 7 .
  • the set of networks may refer to the set of PLMNs.
  • the network set may refer to a set of subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnet may refer to a non-public network NPN.
  • the multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN.
  • the first information may include a network set to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network slice supported by each network in the network set. That is, the network in the network set in the first information is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  • the registration request message may not carry information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. That is to say, when the network device determines the first information, the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access may not be considered. This step may refer to the description in step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
  • the first information may include a network set to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network slice supported by each network in the network set, and each network in the network set supports the access requested by the terminal device. At least one network slice of the plurality of network slices. That is, the network in the network set in the first information is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and the network can support at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. This case is a subset of the previous case, in which each network in the set of networks supports at least one network slice of the plurality of network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network set includes a first network and a second network, wherein the first network supports the network slice 1 that the terminal device requests to access, and the second network supports the network slice 2 that the terminal device requests to access, and the network set does not include A network that cannot support neither network slice 1 nor network slice 2.
  • the registration request message carries information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the network set in the first information may indicate other networks except the network to which the terminal device has been registered, that is, may not include the network to which the current terminal device has been registered.
  • the first information includes information about excluding other networks except the first network.
  • the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. Slicing; the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information, and optionally, further according to the information carried in the registration request message. For example, the network device can first obtain the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF or locally configured information, and determine the above-mentioned correspondence according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the terminal device.
  • the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then presents the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and Information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the end device is allowed to register. For details of this implementation, refer to the description of step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
  • the network device determining the first information includes: the network device sends a request message to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus, optionally, the request message carries the information carried in the registration request message; the network device The roaming preference SOR information is received from the SOR-AF device, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus generates the first information, and feeds it back to the network device in the form of SOR information, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information.
  • this embodiment is suitable for cross-PLMN scenarios. Details of this embodiment can be referred to the description of FIG. 13 .
  • the network device determines the first information, and further includes: the network device determines the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device, wherein the network set in the first information includes networks other than the first network. at least one network. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it may remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information.
  • step 1402 For other details of step 1402, reference may be made to the description in step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
  • Step 1403 the network device sends the first information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first information from the network device.
  • the first information indicates the network set and information of network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set reference may be made to the description of step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
  • the UDM sends SOR information to the terminal device, and the SOR information includes the first information.
  • the UDM sends the first information to the terminal device through the AMF, and the terminal device receives the first information from the UDM through the AMF.
  • the network device sends to the terminal device indication information that further includes instructing the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
  • Step 1404 The terminal device selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed from the network set in the first information, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is selected by the multiple network slices. Supported by at least one of the networks.
  • the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device include a first network slice and a second network slice.
  • the terminal device selects the first network that supports the first network slice, and selects all network slices that support the second network slice. the second network.
  • the above description may be applicable to the case where the terminal device directly selects multiple networks according to the received first information.
  • the above description can also be applied to the case where the terminal device updates the network selector controlled by the operator or assists in updating the network selector controlled by the user according to the SOR information.
  • the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and then selects multiple networks according to the updated operator-controlled selector or user-controlled selector.
  • the terminal device When the above description can also be applied to when the terminal device assists in updating the network selector controlled by the user according to the SOR information, optionally, the terminal device prompts the user according to the received SOR information third information, where the third information is used for The user is instructed to select multiple networks; the terminal device receives an instruction from the user, and selects the multiple networks according to the instruction.
  • step 1206 For other details of this step, reference may be made to the description of step 1206 in FIG. 12 .
  • Step 1405 the terminal device registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
  • Registering to at least one of the multiple networks means: if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks except the first network at least one network; or, the terminal device registers with the multiple networks.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device has already registered to the first network through the above steps, the terminal device re-registers to the second network according to the selected multiple networks. Otherwise, the terminal device registers with the first network and the second network according to the selected multiple networks.
  • step 1207 in FIG. 12 For other details of this step, please refer to the description of step 1207 in FIG. 12 .
  • the terminal device can register with multiple networks according to the multiple network slices to be accessed, so that the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device can be used in the combination of multiple networks, so as to satisfy the needs of the terminal device. It is expected to use the network slicing requirements to better serve users and improve user experience.
  • each message in the above figures may have other names.
  • the information transfer between each network element can also be realized by invoking the network function of each network element under the service-based architecture, which is not limited in the present invention.
  • the UDM may store context information of different networks separately, and the context information corresponding to each network includes an identifier (identifier, ID) of a serving AMF (serving AMF).
  • identifier ID
  • serving AMF serving AMF
  • the serving AMF provides access management services for the UE. That is to say, UDM stores the association information of different PLMNs and their corresponding service AMFs, as shown in Table 10:
  • the UDM When the UE first registers to the first PLMN, and then registers to the second PLMN, if the two PLMNs belong to the PLMNs that the UDM allows the UE to register, the UDM will not perform the deregistration operation on the AMF of the service associated with the first PLMN, That is, the UDM will keep the AMF of the service associated with the first PLMN in a registered state. If the currently registered PLMN of the UE is PLMN1, and subsequently registers to PLMN2, the UDM will save the corresponding service AMF IDs of PLMN1 and PLMN2, and will not deregister the AMF6 corresponding to PLMN1.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus, and the communication apparatus may be the terminal equipment in the above method embodiments, or an apparatus including the above terminal equipment, or a component that can be used for the terminal equipment; or, the communication apparatus may be It is the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, or an apparatus including the foregoing network device, or a component that can be used for the network device. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the communication apparatus includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus includes a processing module 701 , a receiving module 702 and a sending module 703 .
  • the processing module 701 is used to implement data processing by the communication device.
  • the receiving module 702 is used to receive the content of the communication device and other units or network elements, and the sending module 703 is used to receive the content of the communication device and other units or network elements.
  • the processing module 701 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component (or referred to as a processing circuit), and the receiving module 702 may be implemented by a receiver or a receiver-related circuit component.
  • the sending module 703 may be implemented by a transmitter or a transmitter-related circuit component.
  • the communication device may be a communication device device, or a chip applied in the communication device device or other combined devices, components, etc. having the functions of the above-mentioned communication device device.
  • the communication device may be any of the network equipment or UDM in FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 , may also be the AMF in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 , or may be the one in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 .
  • the SOR-AF may also be the UE in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg steps 902 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the processing module 701 is configured to determine multiple networks associated with multiple network slices (eg, step 903 in FIG. 9 , steps 1001 to 1003 in FIG. 10 , and step 1102 in FIG. 11 ), wherein the multiple network slices Each network slice in is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks.
  • the sending module 703 is configured to send information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device (for example, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ), and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register to the multiple networks.
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg, steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , and step 1401 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the processing module 701 is configured to determine the first information according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the sending module 703 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire capability information of the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks (eg steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1401 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the processing module 701 is configured to determine the first information (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ) when the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks.
  • a piece of information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the sending module 703 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ), where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
  • the sending module 703 is configured to send information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device (eg steps 901 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to receive information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device (eg, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , and step 1103 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the processing module 701 is configured to register with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks (eg, step 906 in FIG. 9 , step 1104 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to receive the first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , steps in FIG. 14 ) 1403).
  • the processing module 701 is configured to select multiple networks (eg, step 1206 in FIG. 12 and step 1404 in FIG. 14 ) associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, and register with multiple networks. At least one of the networks (eg, step 1207 in Figure 12, and step 1405 in Figure 14).
  • the receiving module 702 is used to perform steps 901 and 904 in FIG. 9 and steps 1201 and 1204 in FIG. 12 ; the sending module 703 is used to perform steps 902 and 905 in FIG. 9 . , and steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 .
  • the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving module 702 is configured to receive, from the network device, information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1001 in FIG. 10 , step 1301 in FIG. 13 ); processing module 701 is used to generate roaming preference SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1002 in FIG. 10 , step 1302 in FIG. 13 ); the sending module 703 is used to send the SOR information to the network device (eg step 1003 in FIG. 10, step 1303 in FIG. 13).
  • the SOR information may indicate a plurality of networks, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks.
  • the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus includes: a processor 801 , a communication interface 802 , and a memory 803 .
  • the processor 801, the communication interface 802 and the memory 803 can be connected to each other through a bus 804; the bus 804 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the above-mentioned bus 804 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in FIG. 8, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 801 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of CPU and NP.
  • the processor may further include a hardware chip.
  • the above-mentioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • the above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general-purpose array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL) or any combination thereof.
  • Memory 803 may be volatile memory or nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • the communication device may be the network device UDM in any of FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 , the AMF in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 , or the SOR in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 .
  • -AF which can also be the UE in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
  • the processor 801 is used for implementing data processing operations of the communication device, and the communication interface 802 is used for implementing receiving operations and sending operations of the communication device.
  • the communication interface 802 is used to obtain information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg, steps 902 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the processor 801 is configured to determine multiple networks associated with multiple network slices (eg, step 903 in FIG. 9 , steps 1001 to 1003 in FIG. 10 , and step 1102 in FIG. 11 ), wherein the multiple network slices Each network slice in is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks.
  • the communication interface 802 is used to send information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device (for example, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ), and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register to the multiple networks.
  • the communication interface 802 is used to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , and step 1401 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the processor 801 is configured to determine the first information according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the communication interface 802 is used to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the communication interface 802 is used to acquire capability information of the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks (eg steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1401 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the processor 801 is configured to determine the first information (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ) when the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks.
  • a piece of information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
  • the communication interface 802 is used to send the first information to the terminal device (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ), where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
  • the communication interface 802 is configured to send information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device (eg steps 901 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the communication interface 802 is used to receive information from a network device of a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices (eg, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the processor 801 is configured to register with at least one network among the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks (for example, step 906 in FIG. 9 and step 1104 in FIG. 11 ).
  • the communication interface 802 is configured to receive first information from the network device, the first information being used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , steps in FIG. 14 ) 1403).
  • the processor 801 is configured to select multiple networks (eg, step 1206 in FIG. 12 or step 1404 in FIG. 14 ) associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, and register with the multiple networks (eg, step 1207 in FIG. 12 or step 1405 in FIG. 14 ).
  • the communication interface 802 is used to execute steps 901 and 904 in FIG. 9 and steps 1201 and 1204 in FIG. 12 ; the communication interface 802 is used to execute steps 902 and 905 in FIG. 9 . , and steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 .
  • the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the communication interface 802 is configured to receive, from the network device, information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1001 in FIG. 10 , step 1301 in FIG. 13 ); the processor 801 is used to generate roaming preference SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1002 in FIG. 10 , step 1302 in FIG. 13 ); the communication interface 802 is used to send the SOR information to the network device (eg step 1003 in FIG. 10, step 1303 in FIG. 13).
  • the SOR information may indicate a plurality of networks, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks.
  • the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  • the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device (eg, UDM) and a terminal device (eg, UE), wherein the network device executes the method performed by the UDM in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 .
  • the terminal device executes the method executed by the UE in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 .
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned network device (eg, UDM) and a terminal device (eg, UE), wherein the network device performs the operations performed by the UDM in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 .
  • the terminal device executes the method executed by the UE in the embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned network device (such as UDM) and a network device (such as SOR-AF), wherein the UDM performs the method performed by the UDM in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 , the SOR-AF performs the method performed by the SOR-AF in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 .
  • UDM the aforementioned network device
  • SOR-AF network device
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device (eg, UDM) and network device (eg, AMF), wherein the UDM executes the UDM in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
  • the AMF executes the method executed by the AMF in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement FIGS. 9 to 14 provided by the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the UDM-related process in any of the embodiments shown, or the computer may implement the AMF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 provided by the above method embodiment.
  • the computer can implement the SOR-AF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 provided by the above method embodiment, or the computer can implement the process shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 9 provided by the above method embodiment. 11.
  • the UE-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 The UDM-related process in any of the embodiments shown, or the computer may implement the AMF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 provided by the above method embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, where the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement any one of FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 provided by the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the UDM-related process in the illustrated embodiment, or the computer can implement the AMF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 provided by the above method embodiment, or,
  • the computer can implement the SOR-AF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 provided by the above method embodiment, or the computer can implement the process shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , and FIG. 12 or the UE-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 .
  • the present application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes of the UDM, AMF, SOR-AF or UE in the method for registering to multiple networks provided in this application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used for reading and executing the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor acquires the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip, and the like.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the above-mentioned chip can also be replaced by a chip system, which will not be repeated here.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual conditions to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks. The method comprises: a network device or a terminal device determines, according to information of multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, the multiple networks supporting the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, and then the terminal device can register to the multiple networks. The multiple networks may be multiple public land mobile networks (PLMNs), or may be multiple sub-networks in one PLMN, such as non-public networks (NPNs). By means of the method, the terminal device can access the multiple network slices by registering to the multiple networks, thereby satisfying the requirements of the network slices desired by the terminal device, better providing services for users, and improving the user experience.

Description

注册至多个网络的方法、装置和系统Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种注册至多个网络的方法、装置和系统。The present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, apparatus and system for registering with multiple networks.
背景技术Background technique
在第五代(the 5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中,不同类型应用场景对网络的需求是差异化的,有的甚至相互冲突。通过单一网络同时为不同类型应用场景提供服务,会导致网络架构复杂、网络管理效率和资源利用效率低下。网络切片(network slicing)技术通过在同一网络基础设施上建立虚拟独立逻辑网络的方式,可以为不同的应用场景提供相互隔离的网络环境,使得不同应用场景可以按照各自的需求定制网络功能和特性,以保障不同业务的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)需求。也就是说,通过网络切片技术,一个物理网络被划分为多个虚拟网络。一个虚拟网络当作一个“网络切片”,每个网络切片之间是相互独立的,每个网络切片按照应用场景的需求进行网络功能的定制和管理。因此,网络切片对应一个或多个特定的业务。In the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication system, different types of application scenarios have different network requirements, and some even conflict with each other. Providing services for different types of application scenarios at the same time through a single network will result in complex network architecture, low network management efficiency, and low resource utilization efficiency. Network slicing technology can provide isolated network environments for different application scenarios by establishing virtual independent logical networks on the same network infrastructure, so that different application scenarios can customize network functions and features according to their own needs. In order to ensure the quality of service (QoS) requirements of different services. That is, through network slicing technology, a physical network is divided into multiple virtual networks. A virtual network is regarded as a "network slice", each network slice is independent of each other, and each network slice customizes and manages network functions according to the requirements of the application scenario. Therefore, a network slice corresponds to one or more specific services.
公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)是一种运营商为公众提供陆地移动通信业务而建立和经营的网络。不同的PLMN支持的网络切片可能是相同的,也可能是不同的。在漫游场景下,一个用户设备(user equipment,UE)从归属公共陆地移动网络(home public land mobile network,HPLMN)移动到拜访地公共陆地移动网络(visited public land mobile network,VPLMN)。由于HPLMN支持的网络切片与VPLMN支持的网络切片可能并不完全相同,而UE期待接入多个不同的网络切片来获得多种类型的业务的服务,那么,该UE在HPLMN能够使用的多个网络切片中的某个网络切片在该VPLMN可能不能继续使用。这样该UE将无法使用期待的所有类型的业务,降低了用户体验。A public land mobile network (PLMN) is a network established and operated by operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public. The network slices supported by different PLMNs may be the same or different. In a roaming scenario, a user equipment (UE) moves from a home public land mobile network (HPLMN) to a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN). Since the network slices supported by HPLMN may not be exactly the same as those supported by VPLMN, and the UE expects to access multiple different network slices to obtain services of various types of services, the UE can use multiple network slices in HPLMN One of the network slices may no longer be available in this VPLMN. In this way, the UE cannot use all expected types of services, which reduces the user experience.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请描述了一种注册至多个网络的方法、装置和系统。This application describes a method, apparatus and system for registering with multiple networks.
第一方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由网络设备执行。该方法包括:网络设备获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;网络设备确定与该多个网络切片关联的多个网络,其中,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;网络设备向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息,多个网络关联的信息用于终端设备注册至多个网络。根据上述方案,网络设备确定能够支持请求接入的多个网络切片的多个网络,并向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息,使得终端设备可以注册至该多个网络,通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片,从而满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地 为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device. The method includes: the network device acquires information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access; the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is accessed by multiple network slices Supported by at least one network in the network; the network device sends information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device, and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register with the multiple networks. According to the above solution, the network device determines multiple networks that can support the multiple network slices requested for access, and sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can register with the multiple networks, through the registered to the multiple networks. Multiple networks are used to use multiple network slices requested by the terminal device to access, so as to meet the requirements of the network slice expected to be used by the terminal device, better provide services for users, and improve user experience.
例如,多个网络可以是指多个PLMN。例如,上述方法可以适用于终端设备移出HPLMN后的场景,可以理解为漫游场景或者跨PLMN的场景。漫游地的不同PLMN支持不同的网络切片。通过上述方法,终端设备可以注册至多个PLMN,通过多个PLMN来使用终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片。或者,多个网络可以是指一个PLMN下的多个子网,例如,子网可以是指非公共网络NPN。多个子网可以是HPLMN下的多个子网,或者,可以是VPLMN下的多个子网。HPLMN或一个VPLMN下的不同子网支持不同的网络切片。通过上述方法,终端设备可以注册至多个子网,通过多个子网来使用终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片。上述描述同样适用于本申请中其他方面提供的方法,不再赘述。For example, multiple networks may refer to multiple PLMNs. For example, the above method can be applied to a scenario where the terminal device moves out of the HPLMN, which can be understood as a roaming scenario or a cross-PLMN scenario. Different PLMNs in the roaming place support different network slices. Through the above method, the terminal device can register with multiple PLMNs, and use multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple PLMNs. Alternatively, the multiple networks may refer to multiple subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnets may refer to a non-public network NPN. The multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN. Different subnets under an HPLMN or a VPLMN support different network slices. Through the above method, a terminal device can register with multiple subnets, and use multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple subnets. The above description is also applicable to the methods provided in other aspects of this application, and will not be repeated here.
“注册至多个网络”可以理解为“同时注册至多个网络”。“同时”并不限制终端设备要在同一时间执行注册至多个网络的动作,终端设备可以先注册至多个网络中的第一网络,然后注册至多个网络中的其他网络,并且,当终端设备注册至多个网络中的其他网络时,终端设备在第一网络中保持注册的状态。上述描述同样适用于本申请中其他方面提供的方法,不再赘述。"Registering to multiple networks" can be understood as "registering to multiple networks at the same time". "Concurrently" does not limit the terminal device to perform the action of registering to multiple networks at the same time. The terminal device can first register with the first network among the multiple networks, and then register with other networks among the multiple networks. When connecting to other networks in the plurality of networks, the terminal device remains registered in the first network. The above description is also applicable to the methods provided in other aspects of this application, and will not be repeated here.
例如,网络设备可以是统一数据管理UDM装置。UDM装置可以通过移动性管理AMF装置从终端设备接收上述多个网络切片的信息,并通过该AMF装置向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息。For example, the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance. The UDM apparatus may receive the information of the above-mentioned multiple network slices from the terminal equipment through the mobility management AMF apparatus, and send the information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal equipment through the AMF apparatus.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备从终端设备接收终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备获取对应信息,对应信息用于指示允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备根据对应信息和终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络。也就是说,网络设备获取了允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,而后由网络设备根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,来确定多个网络,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片均被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. The network slices supported by each network in ; the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices according to the corresponding information and the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. That is to say, the network device acquires the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then the network device obtains information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access according to the information to determine a plurality of networks, each of the plurality of network slices being supported by at least one of the plurality of networks.
或者,在另一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备向漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;网络设备从SOR-AF装置接收漫游优选SOR信息,网络设备根据SOR信息确定多个网络。也就是说,SOR-AF装置根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来确定多个网络,并通过SOR信息的方式反馈给网络设备。例如,此实施方式可以适用于上述漫游场景。Or, in another possible implementation manner, the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device sends the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus information; the network equipment receives roaming preferred SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network equipment determines multiple networks according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus determines multiple networks according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds it back to the network device by means of SOR information. For example, this embodiment can be applied to the above-mentioned roaming scenario.
一种可能的实施方式中,上述方法还包括:网络设备确定与多个网络关联的信息,其中,与多个网络关联的信息指示该多个网络,或者,当多个网络包括终端设备当前注册的第一网络,与多个网络关联的信息也可以指示多个网络中除第一网络外的至少一个网络的信息。也就是说,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络后,可以去除掉终端设备当前注册的网络,来确定与多个网络关联的信息。通过该实施方式, 多个网络的信息得到了精简。In a possible implementation manner, the above method further includes: the network device determines information associated with multiple networks, wherein the information associated with multiple networks indicates the multiple networks, or, when multiple networks include the terminal device currently registered the first network, the information associated with the multiple networks may also indicate information of at least one network in the multiple networks except the first network. That is, after the network device determines the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, the network currently registered by the terminal device can be removed to determine the information associated with the multiple networks. With this embodiment, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备确定一个网络集合,该网络集合中包括上述多个网络。然后,网络设备向终端设备发送包含多个网络的网络集合的信息,终端设备通过注册至该网络集合中的多个网络可以满足终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determining multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices includes: the network device determining a network set, where the network set includes the foregoing multiple networks. Then, the network device sends information of a network set including multiple networks to the terminal device, and the terminal device can satisfy the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access by registering with the multiple networks in the network set.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备确定多个网络集合,其中,终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络集合中每个网络集合中的多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持,换句话说,多个网络集合中的每个网络集合包括分别支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的多个网络。网络设备可以从多个网络集合中选一个网络集合作为确定的多个网络并发送给终端设备。或者,网络设备可以向终端设备发送多个符合条件的网络集合,其中,这多个网络集合包括了终端设备最终注册至的多个网络所在的网络集合。例如,终端设备最终注册至的多个网络所在的网络集合为多个网络集合中优先级最高的网络集合。或者,当网络设备向终端设备发送包含多个符合条件的网络集合的信息,由终端设备选择一个符合条件的网络集合,并注册至该网络集合中的网络。In another possible implementation manner, the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device determines multiple network sets, wherein each of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access Network slicing is supported by at least one of the multiple networks in each of the multiple network sets, in other words, each network set in the multiple network sets includes multiple Multiple networks for network slicing. The network device may select one network set from multiple network sets as the determined multiple networks and send it to the terminal device. Alternatively, the network device may send multiple network sets that meet the conditions to the terminal device, where the multiple network sets include the network sets where the multiple networks to which the terminal device finally registers are located. For example, the network set where the multiple networks to which the terminal device is finally registered is located is the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets. Alternatively, when the network device sends information including multiple network sets that meet the conditions to the terminal device, the terminal device selects a network set that meets the conditions, and registers with the networks in the network set.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送SOR信息,SOR信息包括与多个网络关联的信息。也就是说,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络后,与多个网络切片关联的多个网络包括在SOR信息中,网络设备通过SOR信息向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。In a possible implementation manner, the network device sending information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device includes: the network device sending SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes information associated with multiple networks. That is, after the network device determines the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices are included in the SOR information, and the network device sends the terminal device through the SOR information the multiple networks associated with the multiple networks. information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送注册至多个网络的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端设备注册至多个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
第二方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由终端设备执行。该方法包括:终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;终端设备从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息,其中,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;终端设备根据多个网络的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。例如,若所述终端设备已注册至多个网络中的第一网络,终端设备注册至多个网络中除第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,终端设备注册至多个网络。不管是哪一种方式,终端设备最终注册至了上述多个网络。根据上述方案,终端设备根据收到的多个网络的信息,注册至该多个网络,通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片,以达到满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a terminal device. The method includes: the terminal device sends information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device; the terminal device receives information from the network device of multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices, wherein the multiple network slices are Each network slice is supported by at least one of the multiple networks; the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks. For example, if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to at least one network of the multiple networks except the first network; or, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks. Regardless of the method, the terminal device eventually registers with the above-mentioned multiple networks. According to the above solution, the terminal device registers with the multiple networks according to the information received from the multiple networks, and uses the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access through the multiple networks registered to the multiple networks, so as to meet the expected use of the terminal device. meet the needs of network slicing, better serve users and improve user experience.
多个网络可参考第一方面中的多个网络的描述,此处不再赘述。For the multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of the multiple networks in the first aspect, which is not repeated here.
例如,网络设备可以是统一数据管理UDM装置。终端设备可以通过该AMF装置向UDM装置发送请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,也可以通过移动性管理AMF装置从UDM装置接收上述多个网络的信息。For example, the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance. The terminal device can send the information of multiple network slices for which access is requested to the UDM device through the AMF device, and can also receive the information of the above-mentioned multiple networks from the UDM device through the mobility management AMF device.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备的能力信息,能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网 络的信息,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收漫游优选SOR信息,SOR信息包括多个网络的信息。也就是说,终端设备能够以接收SOR信息的形式从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。进一步的,终端设备根据多个网络的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络,包括:终端设备根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的选择器或辅助更新用户控制的选择器;终端设备根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device receives information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device, including: the terminal device receives roaming preference SOR information from the network device, where the SOR information includes information of multiple networks. That is, the terminal device can receive information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device in the form of receiving SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios. Further, the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks, including: the terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assists in updating the user-controlled selector according to the SOR information; The operator-controlled selector or the user-controlled selector is registered with at least one of the plurality of networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:终端设备从网络设备接收注册至多个网络的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端设备注册至多个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receives, from the network device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收多个网络集合,多个网络集合包括第一网络集合,第一网络集合包括多个网络。进一步的,终端设备根据多个网络的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络,包括:终端设备从多个网络集合中选择第一网络集合,根据第一网络集合中多个网络的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。例如,第一网络集合是多个网络集合中优先级最高的网络集合。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device receiving information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device includes: the terminal device receiving multiple network sets from the network device, the multiple network sets including the first network set, The first set of networks includes a plurality of networks. Further, registering the terminal device with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks includes: the terminal device selects the first network set from the multiple network sets, and according to the information of the multiple networks in the first network set, Register with at least one of the multiple networks. For example, the first network set is the network set with the highest priority among the plurality of network sets.
第三方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由终端设备执行。该方法包括:终端设备从网络设备接收第一信息,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,或者说,第一信息包括了网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的关联关系。终端设备从该网络集合中选择与终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,其中,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;终端设备注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。例如,若所述终端设备已注册至多个网络中的第一网络,终端设备注册至多个网络中除第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,终端设备注册至多个网络。不管是哪一种方式,终端设备最终注册至了上述多个网络。根据上述方案,终端设备选择出多个网络并注册至该多个网络,通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备待接入的多个网络切片,以达到满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a terminal device. The method includes: the terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and network slices supported by each network in the network set, or in other words, the first information includes the network set and each network in the network set The association of network slices supported by the network. The terminal device selects, from the network set, multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one of the multiple networks; The terminal device is registered with at least one of the multiple networks. For example, if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to at least one network of the multiple networks except the first network; or, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks. Regardless of the method, the terminal device eventually registers with the above-mentioned multiple networks. According to the above solution, the terminal device selects multiple networks and registers with the multiple networks, and uses the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the terminal device. requirements, better serve users, and improve user experience.
多个网络可参考第一方面中的多个网络的描述,此处不再赘述。For the multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of the multiple networks in the first aspect, which is not repeated here.
例如,网络设备可以是统一数据管理UDM装置。终端设备可以通过移动性管理AMF装置从UDM装置接收上述第一信息。For example, the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance. The terminal device may receive the above-mentioned first information from the UDM device through the mobility management AMF device.
一种可能的实施方式中,可选的,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备的能力信息,能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。In a possible implementation manner, optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,可选的,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。In a possible implementation manner, optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device sends, to the network device, information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备从网络设备接收第一信息,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收漫游优选SOR信息,SOR信息包括上述第一信息,即SOR信息包括了该网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的关联关系。也就是说,终端设备不仅可以直接从网络设备接收网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的关联关系,在另一种实现方式中,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的关联关系可以以SOR信息的形式呈现。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。进一步 的,终端设备从网络集合中选择与终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,包括:终端设备根据SOR信息中的第一信息,更新运营商控制的选择器或辅助更新用户控制的选择器;终端设备根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,选择多个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device receiving the first information from the network device includes: the terminal device receiving the roaming preference SOR information from the network device, and the SOR information includes the above-mentioned first information, that is, the SOR information includes the network set and the network set. The association of network slices supported by each network in . That is to say, the terminal device can not only directly receive the network set and the association relationship of the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the network device, but in another implementation manner, the network set and the networks supported by each network in the network set The association relationship of slices can be presented in the form of SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios. Further, the terminal device selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, including: the terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assistant according to the first information in the SOR information. Update the selector controlled by the user; the terminal device selects multiple networks according to the updated selector controlled by the operator or the selector controlled by the user.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络集合中的每个网络为允许终端设备注册至的网络。In a possible implementation manner, each network in the network set is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
或者,另一种可能的实施方式中,若终端设备向网络设备发送了终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,那么在接收到的第一信息中,不支持与终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中任何一个网络切片的网络可以被去除。也就是说,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。Or, in another possible implementation manner, if the terminal device sends information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device, the received first information does not support requesting access with the terminal device. The network of any one of the multiple network slices can be removed. That is, each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:终端设备从网络设备接收指示终端设备注册至多个网络的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving, from the network device, indication information indicating that the terminal device is registered with multiple networks.
第四方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由网络设备执行。该方法包括:网络设备获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;网络设备根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定第一信息,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。网络设备向终端设备发送该第一信息,该第一信息用于终端设备注册至网络集合中的多个网络。根据上述方案,网络设备确定能够支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中至少一个网络切片的网络集合,并向终端设备发送该网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。终端设备收到第一信息后,根据第一信息注册至网络集合中的网络,通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备待接入的多个网络切片,以达到满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device. The method includes: the network device obtains information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device; the network device determines first information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate a network set and Network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. The network device sends the first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set. According to the above solution, the network device determines a network set capable of supporting at least one network slice among the multiple network slices requested by the terminal device to access, and sends the network set and the network slice supported by each network in the network set to the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the first information, it registers with the network in the network set according to the first information, and uses multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to it, so as to achieve the network that the terminal device expects to use The demand for slicing can better serve users and improve user experience.
例如,网络设备可以是统一数据管理UDM装置。UDM装置可以通过移动性管理AMF装置从终端设备接收终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,并通过该AMF装置向终端设备发送第一信息。For example, the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance. The UDM apparatus may receive information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the terminal equipment through the mobility management AMF apparatus, and send the first information to the terminal equipment through the AMF apparatus.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备从终端设备接收终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, where the capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备获取对应信息,对应信息用于指示允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备根据对应信息和终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定第一信息。也就是说,网络设备已知允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,而后根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,选出支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片的网络集合,并获取该网络集合对应支持的网络切片的信息,以第一信息的形式呈现。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. Slice; the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information and the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. That is to say, the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then selects the network slices according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. A network set that supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device is obtained, and the information of the supported network slice corresponding to the network set is obtained and presented in the form of first information.
另一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备向漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;网络设备从SOR-AF装置接收漫游优选SOR信息,网络设备根据SOR信息确定第一信息。也就是说,SOR-AF装置根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来生成SOR信息并 将该SOR信息反馈给网络设备,网络设备根据SOR信息来确定第一信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。In another possible implementation manner, the network device determines the first information, including: the network device sends information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF device; After receiving the roaming preference SOR information, the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. That is, the SOR-AF apparatus generates SOR information according to information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds back the SOR information to the network device, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息中的网络集合指示该多个网络,或者,当网络集合包括终端设备当前注册的第一网络,第一信息中的网络集合指示除第一网络外的至少一个网络。即网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备根据终端设备当前注册的第一网络确定第一信息。也就是说,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络后,可以去除掉终端设备当前注册的网络,来确定第一信息。通过该实施方式,多个网络的信息得到了精简。In a possible implementation manner, the network set in the first information indicates the multiple networks, or, when the network set includes the first network currently registered by the terminal device, the network set in the first information indicates the network other than the first network. at least one network. That is, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device determining the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it may remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information. With this implementation, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送SOR信息,SOR信息包括第一信息。也就是说,网络设备通过SOR信息向终端设备发送第一信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。In a possible implementation manner, sending the first information by the network device to the terminal device includes: the network device sends SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the first information. That is, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device through the SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送注册至多个网络的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端设备注册至多个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
第五方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由网络设备执行。该方法包括:网络设备从终端设备接收终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力;网络设备确定第一信息,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备向终端设备发送该第一信息,该第一信息用于终端设备注册至网络集合中的多个网络。根据上述方案,在终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力的情况下,网络设备确定网络集合,并向终端设备发送该网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。终端设备收到第一信息后,根据终端设备待接入的网络切片以及第一信息注册至网络集合中的网络,通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备待接入的多个网络切片,以达到满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a network device. The method includes: the network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks; the network device determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and each network set in the network set. network slices supported by each network; the network device sends the first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set. According to the above solution, when the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks, the network device determines a network set, and sends the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set to the terminal device. After receiving the first information, the terminal device registers to the network in the network set according to the network slice to be accessed by the terminal device and the first information, and uses the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device through the multiple networks registered to, In order to meet the needs of network slices expected to be used by terminal devices, it can better provide services for users and improve user experience.
例如,网络设备可以是统一数据管理UDM装置。UDM装置可以通过移动性管理AMF装置从终端设备接收终端设备的能力信息,并通过该AMF装置向终端设备发送第一信息。For example, the network device may be a unified data management UDM appliance. The UDM device may receive capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device through the mobility management AMF device, and send the first information to the terminal device through the AMF device.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备获取对应信息,对应信息用于指示允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备根据对应信息和终端设备的能力信息,确定第一信息。也就是说,网络设备已知允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,在终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力的情况下,以第一信息的形式呈现允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. Slicing; the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information and the capability information of the terminal device. That is to say, the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network slice information supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. A form of information presents the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information on the network slices supported by each of the networks to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
另一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息包括:网络设备向漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置发送终端设备的能力信息;网络设备从SOR-AF装置接收漫游优选SOR信息,网络设备根据SOR信息确定第一信息。也就是说,SOR-AF装置根据终端设备的能力信息来生成第一信息,并通过SOR信息的方式反馈给网络设备,网络设备根据SOR信息来确定第一信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。In another possible implementation manner, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device sends capability information of the terminal device to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF device; the network device receives the roaming preference SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network device The first information is determined according to the SOR information. That is, the SOR-AF apparatus generates the first information according to the capability information of the terminal device, and feeds it back to the network device in the form of SOR information, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息中的网络集合指示该多个网络,或者,当网络 集合包括终端设备当前注册的第一网络,第一信息指示除第一网络外的至少一个网络。即网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备根据终端设备当前注册的第一网络确定第一信息。也就是说,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络后,可以去除掉终端设备当前注册的网络,来确定第一信息得到最终的多个网络。通过该实施方式,多个网络的信息得到了精简。In a possible implementation manner, the network set in the first information indicates the multiple networks, or, when the network set includes the first network currently registered by the terminal device, the first information indicates at least one network other than the first network. That is, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device determining the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it can remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information to obtain the final multiple networks. With this implementation, the information of multiple networks is simplified.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送SOR信息,SOR信息包括第一信息。也就是说,网络设备通过SOR信息向终端设备发送第一信息。例如,此实施方式适用于漫游场景。In a possible implementation manner, sending the first information by the network device to the terminal device includes: the network device sends SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the first information. That is, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device through the SOR information. For example, this implementation is suitable for roaming scenarios.
一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送注册至多个网络的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端设备注册至多个网络。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device sends, to the terminal device, indication information for registering with multiple networks, where the indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
第六方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由统一数据管理UDM装置执行。该方法包括:UDM装置获取服务的AMF的标识,将终端设备注册至的多个网络的上下文信息分开存储,多个网络中的每个网络对应的上下文信息包括服务的AMF的标识。也就是说,网络设备存储多个网络和多个网络中每个网络对应的服务的AMF的关联信息。当终端设备注册至网络时,该服务的AMF为终端设备提供接入管理服务。当终端设备注册至第一网络,后续又注册第二网络,UDM装置会存储第一网络和第一网络对应的服务的AMF的标识,以及第二网络和第二网络对应的服务的AMF的标识,且不会触发终端设备对第一网络进行去注册。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is performed by a unified data management UDM device. The method includes: the UDM apparatus obtains the identifier of the serving AMF, and separately stores the context information of multiple networks to which the terminal device is registered, and the context information corresponding to each network in the multiple networks includes the identifier of the serving AMF. That is to say, the network device stores the association information of the multiple networks and the AMF of the service corresponding to each of the multiple networks. When a terminal device registers with the network, the AMF of this service provides access management services for the terminal device. When the terminal device registers with the first network and subsequently registers with the second network, the UDM device will store the identifiers of the AMFs of the services corresponding to the first network and the first network, and the identifiers of the AMFs of the services corresponding to the second network and the second network , and will not trigger the terminal device to deregister with the first network.
第七方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由SOR-AF装置执行。该方法包括:SOR-AF装置从网络设备接收终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;SOR-AF装置根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来生成漫游优选SOR信息,所述SOR信息用于指示与多个网络切片的多个网络,其中,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;SOR-AF装置向网络设备发送SOR信息。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, the method being performed by an SOR-AF device. The method includes: the SOR-AF apparatus receives information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the network equipment; the SOR-AF apparatus generates roaming preference SOR information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment, The SOR information is used to indicate multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one network in the multiple networks; the SOR-AF apparatus sends the SOR information to the network device .
第八方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种注册至多个网络的方法,该方法由漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置执行。该方法包括:SOR-AF装置从网络设备接收终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;SOR-AF装置根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来生成漫游优选SOR信息,所述SOR信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被网络集合中的至少一个网络所支持;SOR-AF装置向网络设备发送SOR信息。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for registering with multiple networks, and the method is executed by a roaming preference application function SOR-AF device. The method includes: the SOR-AF apparatus receives information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment from the network equipment; the SOR-AF apparatus generates roaming preference SOR information according to the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal equipment, The SOR information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is supported by at least one network in the network set; Send SOR information.
第九方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器,该处理器用于从存储器中读取并运行程序,以实现如前面第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为统一数据管理UDM装置),或者,以实现如前面第二方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为终端设备),或者,以实现如前面第三方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为终端设备),或者,以实现如前面第四方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为UDM装置),或者,以实现如前面第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为UDM装置),或者,以实现如前面第六方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为UDM装置),或者,以实现如前面第七方面或任一可能的 实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置),或者,以实现如前面第八方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法(例如,当该通信装置为SOR-AF装置)。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor, which is configured to read and run a program from a memory to implement the method ( For example, when the communication device is a unified data management (UDM) device), or, to implement the method as described above in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner (eg, when the communication device is a terminal device), or, to realize the method as described above The method of the third aspect or any possible implementation manner (for example, when the communication apparatus is a terminal device), or, to implement the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner (for example, when the communication apparatus is a terminal device) UDM device), or, to implement the method as the fifth aspect above or any possible implementation manner (for example, when the communication device is a UDM device), or, to implement the sixth aspect or any possible implementation manner as above (for example, when the communication device is a UDM device), or, to implement the method of the seventh aspect or any possible implementation manner (for example, when the communication device is a roaming preference application function SOR-AF device), Or, to implement the method according to the foregoing eighth aspect or any possible implementation manner (for example, when the communication device is a SOR-AF device).
第十方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括网络设备以及终端设备,该网络设备可以执行第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,该终端设备可以执行第二方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In a tenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including a network device and a terminal device, the network device can perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner, and the terminal device can perform the second aspect or The method of any possible embodiment.
第十一方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括网络设备以及终端设备,该终端设备可以执行第三方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,该网络设备可以执行第四方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或者,该网络设备可以执行第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including a network device and a terminal device, the terminal device can execute the method of the third aspect or any possible implementation manner, and the network device can execute the fourth aspect Or the method of any possible implementation manner, or, the network device may execute the fifth aspect or the method of any possible implementation manner.
第十二方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括接入和移动管理功能AMF装置以及统一数据管理UDM装置,该UDM装置可以执行第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或者,该UDM装置可以执行第四方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或者,该UDM装置可以执行第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或者,该UDM装置可以执行第六方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In a twelfth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including an access and mobility management function AMF device and a unified data management UDM device, where the UDM device can execute the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner , or, the UDM apparatus may perform the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner, or the UDM apparatus may perform the method of the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner, or the UDM apparatus may perform the sixth aspect or the method of any possible implementation manner Aspect or the method of any possible embodiment.
第十三方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括统一数据管理UDM装置以及漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置,该UDM装置可以执行第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,该SOR-AF装置可以执行第七方面的实施方式的方法;或者,该UDM装置可以执行第四方面或任一可能的实施方式或第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,该SOR-AF装置可以执行第八方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including a unified data management UDM device and a roaming preference application function SOR-AF device, where the UDM device can execute the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation manner , the SOR-AF device may perform the method of the embodiment of the seventh aspect; or, the UDM device may perform the method of the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner or the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner, the SOR - The AF device may perform the method of the eighth aspect or any possible embodiment.
第十四方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第二方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第三方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第四方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第六方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第七方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第八方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation, or the second aspect or the method of any possible embodiment, or the third aspect or the method of any possible embodiment, or the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the fifth aspect or any possible embodiment The method, or the method of the sixth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the seventh aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the eighth aspect or any possible embodiment.
第十五方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得处理器执行如第一方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第二方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第三方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第四方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第五方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第六方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第七方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法,或第八方面或任一可能的实施方式的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, cause a processor to execute the first aspect or any possible or the method of the second aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the third aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the method of the fourth aspect or any possible embodiment The method of the fifth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the sixth aspect or any possible embodiment, or the seventh aspect or any possible embodiment, or the eighth aspect or any possible embodiment way method.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种场景注册至多个网络的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of registering to multiple networks in a scenario applicable to an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例适用的另一种场景注册至多个网络的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of registering to multiple networks in another scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图3和图4为本申请实施例适用的漫游场景下的网络架构示意图;3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of network architectures in a roaming scenario to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
图5和图6为本申请实施例适用的PLMN内布局了多个子网场景下的网络架构示意图;FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 are schematic diagrams of the network architecture in the PLMN to which the embodiment of the application is applied in a scenario where multiple subnets are laid out;
图7为根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为根据本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为根据本申请实施例提供的一种注册至多个网络的方法的流程交互示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10为根据本申请实施例提供的一种SOR-AF生成SOR信息的流程交互示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the interaction of a flow of SOR-AF generating SOR information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11为根据本申请实施例提供的一种注册至多个网络的方法的另一流程交互示意图;11 is a schematic diagram of another flow interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为根据本申请实施例提供的另一种注册至多个网络的方法的流程交互示意图;12 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为根据本申请实施例提供的另一种SOR-AF生成SOR信息的流程交互示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of another SOR-AF generating SOR information process interaction according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为根据本申请实施例提供的另一种注册至多个网络的方法的另一流程交互示意图。FIG. 14 is another schematic interaction flow diagram of another method for registering with multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the objectives, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present application more clear, the embodiments of the present application will be described in further detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
以下将先对本申请涉及的一些概念进行介绍:The following will first introduce some concepts involved in this application:
1.网络切片:1. Network slicing:
5G将开启一个万物互联的时代,5G支持eMBB、mMTC和URLLC三大场景,三大场景中包含了多样化差异化的应用。5G will usher in an era of the Internet of Everything. 5G supports three scenarios: eMBB, mMTC, and URLLC. The three scenarios include diversified and differentiated applications.
eMBB:基于无线侧频谱利用率和频谱带宽技术的突破,5G可以提供比4G快10倍以上的传输速率。对于当下流行的AR/VR、高清视频直播,只有5G超高速率才能满足需求,4G的传输速率是无法支持的。现在使用VR看高清或者大型交互游戏时,要使用网线来获取数据,在未来通过5G网络进行无线连接,VR/AR可以获得快捷的体验。eMBB: Based on breakthroughs in spectrum utilization and spectrum bandwidth technology on the wireless side, 5G can provide a transmission rate that is more than 10 times faster than 4G. For the current popular AR/VR and high-definition video live broadcast, only the ultra-high speed of 5G can meet the demand, and the transmission speed of 4G cannot be supported. Now, when using VR to watch high-definition or large-scale interactive games, you need to use a network cable to obtain data. In the future, you can connect wirelessly through a 5G network, and VR/AR can get a fast experience.
mMTC:通过多用户共享接入,超密集异构网络等技术,5G可以支持每平方公里接入100万个设备,是4G的10倍。近来智慧城市的快速发展,路灯,井盖,水表等公共设施都已经拥有了网络连接能力,可以进行远程管理,但是5G会有更大的革新。基于5G网络的强大连接能力,才可以把城市各个行业的公共设备都接入智能管理平台。这些公共设施通过5G网络协同工作,只需要少量的维护人员就可以统一管理,大大提升城市的运营效率。mMTC: Through technologies such as multi-user shared access and ultra-dense heterogeneous networks, 5G can support access to 1 million devices per square kilometer, which is 10 times that of 4G. With the recent rapid development of smart cities, public facilities such as street lights, manhole covers, and water meters already have network connection capabilities and can be managed remotely, but 5G will have greater innovation. Based on the strong connection capability of the 5G network, the public equipment of various industries in the city can be connected to the intelligent management platform. These public facilities work together through the 5G network and can be managed in a unified manner with only a small number of maintenance personnel, greatly improving the operational efficiency of the city.
URLLC:在5G场景下最典型的应用就是自动驾驶,自动驾驶最常用的场景如急刹车、车对车,车对人,车对基础设施等多路通信同时进行,需要瞬间进行大量的数据处理并决策。因此需要网络同时具有大带宽、低时延和高可靠性,5G网络具备应对这种场景的能力。URLLC: The most typical application in 5G scenarios is autonomous driving. The most commonly used scenarios for autonomous driving, such as emergency braking, vehicle-to-vehicle, vehicle-to-person, vehicle-to-infrastructure and other multi-channel communications are carried out at the same time, requiring a large amount of data processing in an instant and make decisions. Therefore, the network needs to have large bandwidth, low latency and high reliability at the same time, and the 5G network has the ability to deal with this scenario.
4G时代是通过一张网络满足所有的应用场景和客户群体,例如网络要提供窄带物联网(narrowband internet of things,NB-IoT)能力就开通网元上的NB相关特性,要构筑网络可靠性,就增加网元设备级的冗余备份,通过不断叠加特性去满足大众市场不断提出的诉求。In the 4G era, all application scenarios and customer groups are met through a single network. For example, if the network needs to provide the narrowband internet of things (NB-IoT) capability, the NB-related features on the network element must be enabled, and network reliability must be built. To increase the redundancy backup of the network element equipment level, through the continuous superposition of features to meet the continuous demands of the mass market.
但是垂直行业中各种业务在时延、连接数、可靠性、安全性等方面的要求相去甚远而且具有不可预知性,比如AR业务需要使用>1600Mbps的网络超高带宽、能源抄表业务需要网络提供海量连接,自动驾驶需要网络保证几毫秒的端到端低时延以及99.999%以上的高可靠性,如果还想通过一张网络满足目前所有需求以及未来可能提出的需求,根本不可能实现。However, the requirements of various services in vertical industries in terms of delay, number of connections, reliability, and security are far different and unpredictable. For example, AR services need to use ultra-high network bandwidth of >1600Mbps, and energy meter reading services need The network provides a large number of connections. Autonomous driving requires the network to ensure a low end-to-end latency of a few milliseconds and a high reliability of more than 99.999%. If you want to meet all current needs and possible future needs through a network, it is impossible to achieve. .
网络切片技术可以让运营商在一个硬件基础设施切分出多个虚拟的网络,按需分配资源、灵活组合能力,满足各种业务的不同需求。当新需求提出而目前网络无法满足要求时,运营商只需要为此需求虚拟出一张新的切片网络,而不需要影响已有的切片网络,以最快速度上线业务。Network slicing technology allows operators to segment multiple virtual networks on one hardware infrastructure, allocate resources on demand, and flexibly combine capabilities to meet the different needs of various services. When a new requirement is proposed and the current network cannot meet the requirement, the operator only needs to create a new slicing network for this requirement without affecting the existing slicing network, so that the service can be launched at the fastest speed.
网络切片是通过切片技术在一个通用硬件基础上虚拟出多个端到端的网络,每个网络具有不同网络功能,适配不同类型服务需求。也就是说,网络切片是一个用于支持特定网络能力与网络特性的逻辑隔离的网络。例如,运营商购买物理资源后,针对大众上网业务使用物理资源虚拟出一个eMBB切片网络,之后再针对垂直行业中某些厂商的智能抄表需求,使用物理资源再虚拟出一个mMTC切片网络,两个切片网络分别为不同业务场景提供服务。Network slicing is to virtualize multiple end-to-end networks based on a common hardware through slicing technology. Each network has different network functions and adapts to different types of service requirements. That is, a network slice is a logically isolated network used to support specific network capabilities and network characteristics. For example, after purchasing physical resources, operators use physical resources to virtualize an eMBB slicing network for public Internet services, and then use physical resources to virtualize a mMTC slicing network for the smart meter reading requirements of certain manufacturers in vertical industries. Each slice network provides services for different business scenarios.
虽然垂直行业中各行各业对网络功能的需求多种多样,但是这些需求都可以解析成对网络带宽、连接数、时延、可靠性等网络功能的需求。5G标准也将不同业务对网络功能的需求特点归纳为三大典型场景,相应的这三大典型场景对应的网络切片的类型分别是eMBB切片、mMTC切片、URLLC切片。Although various industries in vertical industries have various requirements for network functions, these requirements can be resolved into requirements for network functions such as network bandwidth, number of connections, delay, and reliability. The 5G standard also summarizes the requirements of different services for network functions into three typical scenarios. The corresponding types of network slices corresponding to these three typical scenarios are eMBB slices, mMTC slices, and URLLC slices.
2.单网络选择切片辅助信息(single network slice selection assistance information,S-NSSAI):2. Single network slice selection assistance information (S-NSSAI):
S-NSSAI用来标识一个网络切片。根据运营商的运营或部署需要,一个S-NSSAI可以关联一个或多个网络切片实例,一个网络切片实例可以关联一个或多个S-NSSAI。例如,eMBB切片1、eMBB切片2和eMBB切片3都是eMBB类型的切片,它们的S-NSSAI值都是0x01000000;eMBB+mMTC切片4既可以为eMBB类型业务提供服务,同时又可以为mMTC业务提供服务,所以它既是eMBB类型切片,又是mMTC类型的切片,对应的S-NSSAI值分别是0x01000000和0x02000000。S-NSSAI is used to identify a network slice. According to the operator's operation or deployment needs, one S-NSSAI can be associated with one or more network slice instances, and one network slice instance can be associated with one or more S-NSSAIs. For example, eMBB slice 1, eMBB slice 2, and eMBB slice 3 are all eMBB slices, and their S-NSSAI values are all 0x01000000; eMBB+mMTC slice 4 can serve both eMBB type services and mMTC services. Provides services, so it is both an eMBB type slice and a mMTC type slice, and the corresponding S-NSSAI values are 0x01000000 and 0x02000000 respectively.
S-NSSAI包括切片/服务类型(slice/service type,SST)和切片差异(slice differentiator,SD)两部分:S-NSSAI includes two parts: slice/service type (SST) and slice differentiator (SD):
SST是指在特性和服务方面预期的网络切片行为。例如,SST的标准取值范围为1、2、3,取值1表示eMBB、取值2表示URLLC、取值3表示大规模物联网(massive internet of things,MIoT)。SST refers to the expected network slicing behavior in terms of features and services. For example, the standard value range of SST is 1, 2, and 3. A value of 1 indicates eMBB, a value of 2 indicates URLLC, and a value of 3 indicates massive Internet of things (MIoT).
SD是一个可选信息,用来补充SST以区分同一个切片/业务类型的多个网络切片。SD is optional information used to supplement SST to distinguish multiple network slices of the same slice/service type.
SST和SD两部分结合起来表示切片类型及同一切片类型的多个切片。例如S-NSSAI取值为0x01000000、0x02000000、0x03000000分别表示eMBB类型切片、URLLC类型切片、MIoT类型切片。而S-NSSAI取值为0x01000001、0x01000002则表示eMBB类型切片,可以分别服务于用户群1和用户群2。The SST and SD parts are combined to represent a slice type and multiple slices of the same slice type. For example, the value of S-NSSAI is 0x01000000, 0x02000000, and 0x03000000, which represent eMBB type slices, URLLC type slices, and MIoT type slices, respectively. The S-NSSAI values of 0x01000001 and 0x01000002 indicate eMBB type slices, which can serve user group 1 and user group 2 respectively.
3.网络切片选择辅助信息(network slice selection assistance information,NSSAI):3. Network slice selection assistance information (NSSAI):
NSSAI是S-NSSNI的集合。5G网络中使用到的NSSAI有请求的NSSAI(requested  NSSAI)、允许的NSSAI(allowed NSSAI)、拒绝的NSSAI(rejected NSSAI)和签约的NSSAI(subscribed NSSAI),它们的具体定义如表1所示:NSSAI is a collection of S-NSSNI. The NSSAI used in the 5G network includes requested NSSAI (requested NSSAI), allowed NSSAI (allowed NSSAI), rejected NSSAI (rejected NSSAI) and subscribed NSSAI (subscribed NSSAI), and their specific definitions are shown in Table 1:
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020137703-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020137703-appb-000001
4.PLMN的选择:4. Selection of PLMN:
PLMN是一种运营商为公众提供陆地移动通信业务而建立和经营的网络。现有技术中UE按照如下优先级选择PLMN:PLMN is a network established and operated by operators to provide land mobile communication services to the public. In the prior art, the UE selects the PLMN according to the following priorities:
第一、当前注册的PLMN(registered PLMN),或者,与当前注册的PLMN等同的PLMN(equivalent RPLMN);First, the currently registered PLMN (registered PLMN), or a PLMN (equivalent RPLMN) equivalent to the currently registered PLMN;
第二、HPLMN,或者,与HPLMN等同的PLMN(EPLMN);Second, HPLMN, or PLMN (EPLMN) equivalent to HPLMN;
第三、用户控制的PLMN选择器(user-controlled PLMN selector);Third, user-controlled PLMN selector (user-controlled PLMN selector);
第四、运营商控制的PLMN选择器(operator-controlled PLMN selector)。Fourth, operator-controlled PLMN selector.
其中,排在第三位和第四位的PLMN选择器各包含了一组具有优先级的PLMN列表以供UE选择,如表2所示。每个PLMN选择器包括根据优先级降序排列的PLMN列表。若UE无法选择排在第一位和第二位的PLMN,则根据排在第三位的用户控制的PLMN选择器来选择PLMN,则UE根据PLMN选择器中PLMN的排序,优先选择优先级高的PLMN,例如,表2中的PLMN1。若UE无法选择排在第一位、第二位和第三位的PLMN,则根据排在第四位的运营商控制的PLMN选择器来选择PLMN,同样的,UE可以根据PLMN选择器中PLMN的排序,优先选择优先级高的PLMN。The PLMN selectors in the third and fourth positions each include a set of priority PLMN lists for the UE to select, as shown in Table 2. Each PLMN selector includes a list of PLMNs in descending order of priority. If the UE cannot select the first and second PLMNs, it selects the PLMN according to the user-controlled PLMN selector in the third place, and then the UE selects the PLMN with the highest priority according to the order of the PLMNs in the PLMN selector. PLMN, for example, PLMN1 in Table 2. If the UE cannot select the PLMN in the first, second and third positions, it will select the PLMN according to the PLMN selector controlled by the operator in the fourth position. Similarly, the UE can select the PLMN according to the PLMN selector in the PLMN selector. , the PLMN with higher priority is selected first.
表2Table 2
用户控制的PLMN选择器/运营商控制的PLMN选择器User Controlled PLMN Selector / Operator Controlled PLMN Selector
PLMN1PLMN1
PLMN2PLMN2
PLMN3PLMN3
PLMN4PLMN4
PLMN5PLMN5
5.漫游优选(Steering of Roaming,SOR)5. Steering of Roaming (SOR)
SOR是一种HPLMN引导漫游的UE来注册至优选的漫游网络中的技术。例如,当漫游协议发生更改时,HPLMN的UDM向UE发送漫游优选(steering of roaming,SOR)信息。例如,SOR信息包括以下中的至少一项:(a)优选PLMN或接入技术的组合的列表(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations),(b)安全包(a secured packet),该安全包包含了通过安全机制封装的上述优选PLMN或接入技术的组合的列表;(c)以上两者均不提供。其中,(a)至(c)是根据运营商的数据分析产生的。SOR is a technique in which the HPLMN directs roaming UEs to register with the preferred roaming network. For example, when the roaming agreement is changed, the UDM of the HPLMN sends roaming preference (steering of roaming, SOR) information to the UE. For example, the SOR information includes at least one of: (a) a list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations, (b) a secured packet that Contains a list of combinations of the above preferred PLMNs or access technologies encapsulated by security mechanisms; (c) neither of the above is provided. Among them, (a) to (c) are generated according to the operator's data analysis.
SOR信息可以被用来更新上述用户控制的PLMN选择器或运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的PLMN列表,UE根据PLMN选择器的优先级以及PLMN选择器中PLMN的优先级进行PLMN的选择并注册,例如,默认SOR信息用于更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器。The SOR information can be used to update the PLMN list in the above-mentioned user-controlled PLMN selector or operator-controlled PLMN selector. The UE selects and registers the PLMN according to the priority of the PLMN selector and the priority of the PLMN in the PLMN selector. For example, the default SOR information is used to update the operator-controlled PLMN selector.
在本申请中,注册至网络也可以理解成接入该网络,以下均以“注册”至网络来表述。In this application, registering with a network can also be understood as accessing the network, which is expressed as "registering" with the network below.
6.非公共网络(Non-Public Network,NPN)6. Non-Public Network (NPN)
NPN是一种面向非公网用户的网络,NPN可以专门为私有实体使用,如企业。NPN可以以不同的形式部署,具体地,NPN可以部署为完全独立的网络,可以由PLMN托管,可以作为PLMN的网络切片。NPN分为以下两种:NPN is a network for non-public network users, NPN can be used exclusively for private entities, such as enterprises. NPN can be deployed in different forms, specifically, NPN can be deployed as a completely independent network, can be hosted by PLMN, and can be used as a network slice of PLMN. There are two types of NPNs:
(1)独立组网的NPN(Stand-alone non-public networks,SNPN)(1) NPN (Stand-alone non-public networks, SNPN) of independent networking
SNPN由NPN运营商运营,可以不依赖PLMN提供的网络功能,UE签约一个或多个NPN,由PLMN ID和网络标识(NID,Network identifier)组合标识一个SNPN。The SNPN is operated by the NPN operator and may not rely on the network functions provided by the PLMN. The UE subscribes to one or more NPNs, and a SNPN is identified by the combination of the PLMN ID and the network identifier (NID, Network identifier).
(2)公网集成NPN,或称为非独立组网的NPN(Public network integrated NPN,PNI-NPN)(2) Public network integrated NPN, or NPN (Public network integrated NPN, PNI-NPN)
PNI-NPN可以通过PLMN网络提供NPN服务,如通过为NPN分配一个或多个网络切片实现NPN功能。PNI-NPN中具有封闭接入组(Closed Access Group,CAG)的概念,可以达到防止其他UE注册该NPN的效果。PNI-NPN由PLMN ID和CAG ID确定一个CAG,UE签约信息中包含CAG ID,未配置CAG-only的指示信息的用户可以支持PNI-NPN和PLMN网络间的切换。PNI-NPN can provide NPN service through PLMN network, such as NPN function by allocating one or more network slices for NPN. The PNI-NPN has a concept of a closed access group (Closed Access Group, CAG), which can achieve the effect of preventing other UEs from registering with the NPN. PNI-NPN determines a CAG by the PLMN ID and CAG ID. The UE subscription information includes the CAG ID. Users without CAG-only indication information can support handover between PNI-NPN and PLMN networks.
不同的PLMN支持的网络切片可能是相同的,也可能是不同的。如图1所示,在图1所示的漫游场景下,当UE移出HPLMN漫游至VPLMN时,存在HPLMN支持的网络切片与VPLMN支持的网络切片不同的情况,即HPLMN的S-NSSAI只能在个别的VPLMN使用。因此,UE在漫游地的某些区域只能使用非优选的一个VPLMN,该VPLMN无法支持UE期待使用的全部网络切片,那么UE就不能在一个PLMN内使用想要使用的全部网络切片。The network slices supported by different PLMNs may be the same or different. As shown in Figure 1, in the roaming scenario shown in Figure 1, when the UE moves out of the HPLMN and roams to the VPLMN, the network slice supported by the HPLMN is different from the network slice supported by the VPLMN, that is, the S-NSSAI of the HPLMN can only be Individual VPLMN use. Therefore, the UE can only use a non-preferred VPLMN in some areas of the roaming place, and the VPLMN cannot support all the network slices that the UE expects to use, so the UE cannot use all the network slices that the UE wants to use in one PLMN.
举例来说,UE想要使用业务1和业务2,其中,业务1由网络切片1提供服务,业务2由网络切片2提供服务。例如,UE请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2。当UE在HPLMN时,HPLMN能够支持网络切片1和网络切片2,UE在注册至HPLMN时可以使用网络切片1和网络切片2。当UE进行漫游时,位于漫游地的不同的PLMN支持的切片情况如下表3:For example, the UE wants to use service 1 and service 2, where service 1 is served by network slice 1 and service 2 is served by network slice 2. For example, the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2. When the UE is in the HPLMN, the HPLMN can support network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 when registering with the HPLMN. When the UE is roaming, the slices supported by different PLMNs located in the roaming place are as shown in Table 3:
表3table 3
PLMN IDPLMN ID 支持的网络切片Supported network slices
PLMN1PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3
PLMN2PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4
PLMN3PLMN3 S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4
PLMN4PLMN4 S-NSSAI 3、S-NSSAI 5S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5
PLMN5PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5
其中,S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 3、S-NSSAI 4、S-NSSAI 5分别用来标识网络切片1、网络切片2、网络切片3、网络切片4、网络切片5。Among them, S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 4, and S-NSSAI 5 are used to identify network slice 1, network slice 2, network slice 3, network slice 4, and network slice 5 respectively.
按照当前UE选择PLMN的方法,UE可以根据优先级在运营商控制的PLMN选择器中选择优先级最高的PLMN作为VPLMN。如表2所示,假设PLMN1的优先级最高,那么UE注册至PLMN1作为VPLMN。然而,不论各个PLMN之间的优先级排序如何,UE仅注册至一个PLMN,因此该UE均无法在一个PLMN内使用网络切片1和网络切片2。According to the current method for the UE to select a PLMN, the UE can select the PLMN with the highest priority as the VPLMN in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator according to the priority. As shown in Table 2, assuming that PLMN1 has the highest priority, the UE registers to PLMN1 as a VPLMN. However, regardless of the priority ordering among the PLMNs, the UE is only registered to one PLMN, so the UE cannot use network slice 1 and network slice 2 within one PLMN.
同一个PLMN下的不同子网(例如,NPN)支持的网络切片可能是相同的,也可能是不同的,如图2所示。在图2的例子中,此PLMN可以为HPLMN,或者,也可以是VPLMN。该PLMN下包括覆盖范围有交叠的子网1和子网2。与图1类似的,UE在移动前可以使用网络切片1和网络切片2,但是移动后子网1只支持网络切片1,子网2只能支持网络切片2。不论UE注册至子网1还是注册至子网2,UE均无法在一个子网内使用网络切片1和网络切片2。The network slices supported by different subnets (e.g., NPN) under the same PLMN may be the same or different, as shown in Figure 2. In the example of FIG. 2 , the PLMN may be an HPLMN, or it may also be a VPLMN. The PLMN includes sub-network 1 and sub-network 2 with overlapping coverage. Similar to Figure 1, the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 before moving, but after moving, subnet 1 only supports network slice 1, and subnet 2 only supports network slice 2. Regardless of whether the UE is registered to Subnet 1 or to Subnet 2, the UE cannot use Network Slice 1 and Network Slice 2 within one subnet.
本发明要解决的问题是如何满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求。以上述图1和图2中的例子为例,本申请旨在提供一种解决方案,使得在上述场景下,UE能够使用网络切片1和网络切片2。The problem to be solved by the present invention is how to meet the requirements of the network slice that the UE expects to use. Taking the above examples in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 as an example, the present application aims to provide a solution, so that the UE can use network slice 1 and network slice 2 in the above scenario.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者应用于未来的通信系统或其它类似的通信系统等。以第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统为例,该系统包括服务化网络架构和基于参考点的网络架构。此外,本申请实施例还可以适用于面向未来的其他通信技术。本申请描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请的技术方案,并不构成对本申请提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。以上各种系统均包含非漫游场景和漫游场景。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication systems or new radio (NR) systems, or applied to future communication systems or other similar communication systems. Taking the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication system as an example, the system includes a service-oriented network architecture and a reference point-based network architecture. In addition, the embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to other future-oriented communication technologies. The network architecture and service scenarios described in this application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of this application more clearly, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by this application. appears, the technical solutions provided in this application are also applicable to similar technical problems. All of the above systems include non-roaming scenarios and roaming scenarios.
如上所述,本申请可适用于漫游场景(或称为跨PLMN的场景),或者,也可以适用于同一个PLMN(HPLMN或VPLMN)内布局了多个子网(例如,NPN)的场景。当本申请用于漫游场景,可以适用于如图3或图4所示的通信系统的网络架构。当本申请用于同一个PLMN内布局了多个子网的场景,可以适用于如图5或图6所示的通信系统的网络架构。As mentioned above, the present application can be applied to a roaming scenario (or a cross-PLMN scenario), or can also be applied to a scenario where multiple subnets (eg, NPN) are deployed in the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN). When the present application is used in a roaming scenario, it can be applied to the network architecture of the communication system as shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 . When the present application is used in a scenario where multiple subnets are laid out in the same PLMN, it can be applied to the network architecture of the communication system as shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 .
对于漫游场景来说,当UE从HPLMN漫游到VPLMN时,根据UE的用户面是 VPLMN终结还是HPLMN终结,漫游场景可以分为本地疏导(local breakout)的漫游场景和归属地路由(home routed)的漫游场景。在漫游场景中,VPLMN和HPLMN之间可以通过各自的安全边缘保护代理(security edge protection proxy,SEPP)进行服务化接口的互通,以实现跨PLMN控制面接口的消息过滤和拓扑隐藏功能。其中,图3为基于服务的接口(service-based interface)的网络架构示意图。图4为基于点对点接口的网络架构示意图。For the roaming scenario, when the UE roams from HPLMN to VPLMN, according to whether the UE's user plane is VPLMN terminated or HPLMN terminated, roaming scenarios can be divided into local breakout roaming scenarios and home routed roaming scenarios. Roaming scene. In the roaming scenario, the VPLMN and the HPLMN can communicate with each other through their respective security edge protection proxy (SEPP) service interfaces, so as to realize the functions of message filtering and topology hiding across the PLMN control plane interface. 3 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a service-based interface. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture based on a point-to-point interface.
对于同一个PLMN内布局了多个子网的场景来说,当UE从HPLMN移动到VPLMN时,VPLMN中布局了多个子网,例如多个NPN,该场景适用的网络架构如图5所示。当UE位于HPLMN时,HPLMN中布局了多个子网,例如多个NPN,该场景适用的网络架构如图6所示。图5和图6均为基于点对点接口的网络架构示意图,基于服务的接口的网络架构示意图的原理类似,不再展示。For the scenario where multiple subnets are laid out in the same PLMN, when the UE moves from the HPLMN to the VPLMN, multiple subnets, such as multiple NPNs, are laid out in the VPLMN. The network architecture applicable to this scenario is shown in Figure 5. When the UE is located in the HPLMN, multiple subnets, such as multiple NPNs, are laid out in the HPLMN, and the network architecture applicable to this scenario is shown in Figure 6 . 5 and 6 are schematic diagrams of a network architecture based on a point-to-point interface, and the principles of a schematic diagram of a network architecture based on a service interface are similar and will not be shown again.
“基于服务的接口”是指,在服务化架构下,控制面内使用基于服务的接口。例如,Namf是AMF网元提供的基于服务的接口,AMF网元可以通过Namf与其他的网络功能通信。Nsmf是SMF提供的基于服务的接口,SMF可以通过Nsmf与其他的网络功能通信。Nnssf是NSSF网元提供的基于服务的接口,NSSF网元可以通过Nnssf与其他的网络功能通信。一个功能网元通过基于服务的接口,可以向被授权的其他功能网元开放它的能力,从而提供网络功能(network function,NF)服务。换句话说,NF服务是指能被提供的各种能力。"Service-based interface" refers to the use of service-based interfaces within the control plane under a service-oriented architecture. For example, Namf is a service-based interface provided by AMF network elements, and AMF network elements can communicate with other network functions through Namf. Nsmf is a service-based interface provided by SMF, and SMF can communicate with other network functions through Nsmf. Nnssf is a service-based interface provided by NSSF network elements, and NSSF network elements can communicate with other network functions through Nnssf. A functional network element can open its capabilities to authorized other functional network elements through a service-based interface, thereby providing network function (NF) services. In other words, NF services refer to the various capabilities that can be provided.
上述网络架构中均可包括三部分,分别是终端设备、无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)和核心网网络。The above network architecture may include three parts, namely terminal equipment, radio access network (RAN) and core network.
下面对该网络架构中涉及的部分网元的功能进行具体说明。The functions of some network elements involved in the network architecture will be described in detail below.
终端设备,是一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端设备通过无线方式与接入网设备相连,从而接入到通信系统中。终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实终端设备、增强现实终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程手术中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、运输安全中的无线终端、智慧城市中的无线终端、或智慧家庭中的无线终端等等。本申请实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不作限定。作为示例而非限定,终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。终端设备还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元,车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请的方法。A terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function. The terminal equipment is wirelessly connected to the access network equipment so as to be connected to the communication system. A terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like. The terminal equipment can be mobile phone, tablet computer, computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality terminal equipment, augmented reality terminal equipment, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in remote surgery, smart grid Wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in transportation security, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device. As an example and not a limitation, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring. The terminal device may also be an on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units, and the vehicle passes the built-in on-board module, on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit. A unit may implement the methods of the present application.
RAN用于实现无线有关的功能。RAN中的节点又可称为接入网设备或基站,用 于将终端设备接入到无线网络。所述接入网设备可以是基站(base station)、LTE系统或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、5G通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)、WiFi接入点(access point,AP)、未来移动通信系统中的基站或WiFi系统中的接入节点等。无线接入网设备也可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),或者分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。本申请实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不作限定。例如,在一种网络结构中,无线接入网设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或为包括CU节点和DU节点的接入网设备。具体的,CU节点用于支持无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)、业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)等协议;DU节点用于支持无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层协议、媒体接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层协议和物理层协议。RAN is used to implement wireless related functions. A node in the RAN may also be called an access network device or a base station, which is used to access the terminal device to the wireless network. The access network device may be a base station (base station), an LTE system or an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB) in an LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), a next-generation base station in a 5G communication system (next generation NodeB, gNB), transmission reception point (TRP), base band unit (BBU), WiFi access point (access point, AP), base station or WiFi system in future mobile communication systems access node etc. The radio access network device may also be a module or unit that completes some functions of the base station, for example, may be a centralized unit (central unit, CU) or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU). The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the wireless access network device. For example, in a network structure, the radio access network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or an access network device including a CU node and a DU node. Specifically, the CU node is used to support radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP), service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) and other protocols; DU node Used to support radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer protocol, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer protocol and physical layer protocol.
核心网网络可包括以下网元中的一个或多个:统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元、应用功能(application function,AF)网元、接入与移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元、以及网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)网元等。上述各网元也可称为装置、设备或实体,本申请并不在此限制,例如,UDM网元也可称为UDM装置、UDM设备或UDM实体。在便于下面的描述中,将采用简称的方式进行,例如,“UDM网元”被简称为“UDM”,“AMF网元”被简称为“AMF”。The core network network may include one or more of the following network elements: unified data management (UDM) network element, application function (AF) network element, access and mobility management function (access and mobility) management function, AMF) network element, session management function (session management function, SMF) network element, user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network element, and network slice selection function (network slice selection function, NSSF) network element, etc. . The above network elements may also be referred to as devices, equipment or entities, which are not limited in this application. For example, UDM network elements may also be referred to as UDM devices, UDM equipment or UDM entities. In the following description, abbreviated manner will be used, for example, "UDM network element" is abbreviated as "UDM", and "AMF network element" is abbreviated as "AMF".
AMF用于负责用户的移动性管理。例如,移动性管理包括移动状态管理,分配用户临时身份标识,认证和授权用户等。AMF is used to be responsible for user mobility management. For example, mobility management includes mobility status management, assigning user temporary identities, authenticating and authorizing users, etc.
SMF用于负责UPF的选择、重选,网络协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配,协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话的建立、修改或释放,服务质量(quality of service,QoS)控制等。SMF is used for selection and reselection of UPF, network protocol (IP) address allocation, protocol data unit (PDU) session establishment, modification or release, quality of service (quality of service, QoS) control Wait.
UDM用于负责管理签约数据,以及当签约数据修改的时候,负责通知相应的网元。The UDM is used to manage the subscription data, and to notify the corresponding network element when the subscription data is modified.
AF用于向UE提供应用层服务。AF代表应用与5G网络其他控制网元进行交互,包括提供服务质量QoS需求、计费(Charging)策略(Policy)需求和路由策略需求等。其中,如图1至图6中所示,SOR-AF是一种用于上述SOR技术的AF,SOR-AF与UDM相连。The AF is used to provide application layer services to the UE. On behalf of the application, AF interacts with other control network elements of the 5G network, including providing QoS requirements, charging policy requirements, and routing policy requirements. Among them, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 6 , the SOR-AF is an AF used for the above-mentioned SOR technology, and the SOR-AF is connected to the UDM.
UPF与数据网络(data network,DN)互连,用于分组数据包的检测、路由和转发。例如,UPF可以作为上行分类器(uplink classifier,ULCL)以支持对流量进行分流后转发到数据网络,或者,UPF可以作为分流点(branching point,BP)以支持multi-homed PDU会话。UPF is interconnected with a data network (DN) for packet detection, routing and forwarding. For example, the UPF can be used as an uplink classifier (ULCL) to support traffic offloading and then forwarded to the data network, or the UPF can be used as a branching point (BP) to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
NSSF用于负责网络切片的选择。在图3至图5的例子中,HPLMN内部署有H-NSSF,VPLMN内部署有V-NSSF。根据本申请实施例的方法,可增加UDM和H-NSSF之间的点对点接口或者服务化操作。NSSF is used to be responsible for the selection of network slices. In the examples of FIGS. 3 to 5 , the H-NSSF is deployed in the HPLMN, and the V-NSSF is deployed in the VPLMN. According to the method of this embodiment of the present application, a point-to-point interface or a service-oriented operation between the UDM and the H-NSSF can be added.
上述各网元既可以由指定的硬件实现、或者,也可以由在指定硬件上的软件实例实现、或者,也可以由在合适的平台上实例化的虚拟功能来实现,本发明并不在此限制。The above-mentioned network elements can be implemented by either specified hardware, or by a software instance on specified hardware, or by a virtual function instantiated on a suitable platform, which is not limited in the present invention. .
当本申请适用于跨PLMN的漫游场景,如图3和图4所示,UE漫游至VPLMN并通过位于VPLMN中的RAN注册至网络,以下描述中的AMF、SMF、NSSF分别是指位于VPLMN中的AMF、SMF、NSSF,而UDM和SOR-AF分别是指位于HPLMN中的UDM和SOR-AF。当本申请适用于同一个VPLMN内布局了多个子网的场景,如图5所示,UE漫游至VPLMN并通过位于VPLMN中的RAN注册至网络,以下描述中的AMF、SMF、NSSF分别是指位于VPLMN中NPN范围内的AMF、SMF、NSSF,而UDM和SOR-AF分别是指位于HPLMN中的UDM和SOR-AF。当本申请适用于同一个HPLMN内布局了多个子网的场景,如图6所示,AMF、SMF、NSSF、UDM和SOR-AF均为位于当前PLMN中的AMF、SMF、NSSF、UDM和SOR-AF。对于NPN,如AMF、SMF、NSSF、UDM和SOR-AF的功能网元可能合设,也可能会分设,并不影响本申请中方法的实现。When this application is applicable to cross-PLMN roaming scenarios, as shown in Figures 3 and 4, the UE roams to the VPLMN and registers with the network through the RAN located in the VPLMN. AMF, SMF, and NSSF in the following description refer to those located in the VPLMN, respectively AMF, SMF, NSSF of , while UDM and SOR-AF refer to UDM and SOR-AF located in HPLMN, respectively. When this application is applicable to the scenario where multiple subnets are deployed in the same VPLMN, as shown in Figure 5, the UE roams to the VPLMN and registers with the network through the RAN located in the VPLMN. AMF, SMF, and NSSF in the following description refer to AMF, SMF, NSSF located within the NPN range in VPLMN, while UDM and SOR-AF refer to UDM and SOR-AF located in HPLMN, respectively. When this application is applicable to the scenario where multiple subnets are deployed in the same HPLMN, as shown in Figure 6, AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR-AF are all AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR located in the current PLMN -AF. For NPN, functional network elements such as AMF, SMF, NSSF, UDM and SOR-AF may be co-located or may be set separately, which does not affect the implementation of the method in this application.
需要说明的是,“多个”是指两个或两个以上,鉴于此,本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“至少一个”,可理解为一个或多个,例如理解为一个、两个或更多个。例如,包括至少一个,是指包括一个、两个或更多个,而且不限制包括的是哪几个。例如,包括A、B和C中的至少一个,那么包括的可以是A、B、C,A和B,A和C,B和C,或A和B和C。同理,对于“至少一种”等描述的理解,也是类似的。It should be noted that "plurality" refers to two or more than two, and in view of this, "plurality" may also be understood as "at least two" in the embodiments of the present application. "At least one" can be understood as one or more, such as one, two or more. For example, including at least one means including one, two or more, and does not limit which ones are included. For example, if at least one of A, B, and C is included, then A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C may be included. Similarly, the understanding of descriptions such as "at least one" is similar.
图7和图8为根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图,该通信装置可以用于执行注册至多个网络的方法。为便于理解,以下将先描述根据本申请实施例提供的一种注册至多个网络的方法。FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are schematic structural diagrams of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus may be used to execute a method for registering with multiple networks. For ease of understanding, a method for registering with multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application will be described first.
图9为根据本申请实施例提供的一种注册至多个网络的方法的流程交互示意图。注册至多个网络可以是注册至多个PLMN,也可以是注册至一个PLMN下的多个子网。以下将以注册至多个PLMN为例进行描述。FIG. 9 is a schematic interactive flowchart of a method for registering to multiple networks according to an embodiment of the present application. Registering with multiple networks may be registering with multiple PLMNs, or may be registering with multiple subnets under one PLMN. The following description will be given by taking registration to multiple PLMNs as an example.
该方法涉及UE、AMF和UDM之间的交互。当本方法用于跨PLMN的漫游场景来注册至多个PLMN时,UE可以是图3或图4中的UE,AMF可以是图3或图4中位于VPLMN中的AMF,UDM可以是图3或图4中位于HPLMN中的UDM。例如,该VPLMN可以是上述表3中的任一PLMN。The method involves interaction between UE, AMF and UDM. When this method is used to register to multiple PLMNs in a cross-PLMN roaming scenario, the UE may be the UE in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 , the AMF may be the AMF located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 , and the UDM may be the AMF in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 . Figure 4 UDM located in HPLMN. For example, the VPLMN may be any of the PLMNs in Table 3 above.
例如,此方法包括如下步骤:For example, this method includes the following steps:
步骤901,UE向AMF发送注册请求(registration request)消息。Step 901, the UE sends a registration request (registration request) message to the AMF.
例如,UE向RAN(图9中未示出)发送注册请求消息,RAN收到注册请求消息后向AMF发送该注册请求消息,例如,RAN可以是图3或图4中位于VPLMN中的RAN。For example, the UE sends a registration request message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 9 ), and the RAN sends the registration request message to the AMF after receiving the registration request message. For example, the RAN may be the RAN located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
相应的,AMF通过RAN从UE接收注册请求消息。Correspondingly, the AMF receives the registration request message from the UE through the RAN.
在图9的例子中,注册请求消息中包括UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以是UE requested NSSAI。例如,UE请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,UE requested NSSAI包括标识网络切片1的 S-NSSAI 1和标识网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。In the example of FIG. 9 , the registration request message includes information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. The information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be UE-requested NSSAI. For example, the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE requested NSSAI includes S-NSSAI 1 that identifies network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 that identifies network slice 2.
此外,该注册请求消息可以包括UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。In addition, the registration request message may include the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
此外,该注册请求消息还可以包括注册类型信息,例如,该注册类型信息可以用于指示此次注册的类型为初始注册。In addition, the registration request message may further include registration type information, for example, the registration type information may be used to indicate that the type of this registration is initial registration.
可选的,注册请求消息中还可以包括UE能力信息,该能力信息指示UE具有注册至多个网络的能力。例如,该能力信息具体用于指示UE中的用户身份模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)具有注册至多个PLMN的能力。例如,UE通过注册请求消息向网络发送UE能力信息,UE能力信息可以通过一个比特(bit)来实现,当能力信息具有第一值(例如,1),表示UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力;当能力信息具有第二值(例如,0),表示UE不具有注册至多个PLMN的能力。或者,当UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,UE通过注册请求消息向网络发送UE能力信息;当UE不具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,UE不发送UE能力信息。Optionally, the registration request message may further include UE capability information, where the capability information indicates that the UE has the capability to register with multiple networks. For example, the capability information is specifically used to indicate that a subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) in the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs. For example, the UE sends the UE capability information to the network through a registration request message, and the UE capability information can be implemented by one bit. When the capability information has a first value (for example, 1), it indicates that the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs; When the capability information has a second value (eg, 0), it indicates that the UE does not have the capability to register with multiple PLMNs. Alternatively, when the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs, the UE sends the UE capability information to the network through a registration request message; when the UE does not have the ability to register with multiple PLMNs, the UE does not send the UE capability information.
AMF收到注册请求消息后,执行注册流程中的相应步骤。例如,如果AMF没有该UE的签约信息,AMF向UDM调用获取签约信息的服务化操作,从而获得UE的签约信息。After the AMF receives the registration request message, it executes the corresponding steps in the registration process. For example, if the AMF does not have the subscription information of the UE, the AMF invokes the servitization operation of acquiring the subscription information from the UDM, so as to obtain the subscription information of the UE.
步骤902,AMF向UDM发送请求消息a。该请求消息a可以包括上述注册请求消息中的信息,例如,请求消息a可以包括UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,如标识网络切片1的S-NSSAI 1和标识网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。Step 902, the AMF sends a request message a to the UDM. The request message a may include the information in the above registration request message. For example, the request message a may include information about multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, such as S-NSSAI 1 identifying network slice 1 and S-NSSAI identifying network slice 2 - NSSAI 2.
相应的,UDM从AMF接收请求消息a。Correspondingly, the UDM receives the request message a from the AMF.
例如,AMF可以通过调用UDM的服务化操作的方式,向UDM发送请求消息a。For example, the AMF may send the request message a to the UDM by invoking the service operation of the UDM.
可选的,UDM在收到请求消息a后,先确定当前PLMN不能支持UE请求接入的全部的多个网络切片。例如,当前PLMN为PLMN 1,如上述表3所示,PLMN 1支持S-NSSAI 1标识的网络切片1和S-NSSAI 3标识的网络切片3,并不能支持S-NSSAI 1标识的网络切片2,因此触发UDM执行如下步骤903。Optionally, after receiving the request message a, the UDM first determines that the current PLMN cannot support all the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. For example, the current PLMN is PLMN 1. As shown in Table 3 above, PLMN 1 supports network slice 1 identified by S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 identified by S-NSSAI 3, but cannot support network slice 2 identified by S-NSSAI 1 , thus triggering the UDM to execute the following step 903 .
步骤903,UDM确定网络集合。Step 903, the UDM determines the network set.
其中,网络集合可以是一个网络集合,或者,也可以是多个网络集合。其中,每个网络集合包括多个PLMN,UE请求接入的每个网络切片被多个PLMN中的至少一个PLMN所支持。The network set may be one network set, or may also be multiple network sets. Wherein, each network set includes multiple PLMNs, and each network slice that the UE requests to access is supported by at least one PLMN among the multiple PLMNs.
如上所述,UE请求接入两个网络切片:网络切片1和网络切片2。那么在每个网络集合中包括至少两个PLMN,其中一个PLMN支持网络切片1,另一个PLMN支持网络切片2。例如,结合上述表3的例子,该网络集合可以包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2},{PLMN1和PLMN5},{PLMN2和PLMN3},{PLMN3和PLMN5}中的一项或多项。其中,{}中的PLMN表示一个网络集合中的多个PLMN。或者,网络集合可以包括{PLMN1和(PLMN2,PLMN5)},()中的PLMN为支持同一种网络切片的PLMN。As mentioned above, the UE requests access to two network slices: network slice 1 and network slice 2. Then each network set includes at least two PLMNs, one of which supports network slice 1 and the other PLMN supports network slice 2. For example, in conjunction with the examples in Table 3 above, the network set may include one or more of: {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, {PLMN2 and PLMN3}, {PLMN3 and PLMN5}. Wherein, the PLMNs in {} represent multiple PLMNs in a network set. Alternatively, the network set may include {PLMN1 and (PLMN2, PLMN5)}, and the PLMNs in ( ) are PLMNs that support the same network slice.
可选的,上述多个网络集合之间不存在优先级的顺序。或者,上述多个网络集合之间存在优先级的顺序。例如,排在第一位的网络集合为优先级最高的网络集合。举例来说,{PLMN1和PLMN2}为优先级最高的一个网络集合,其次为{PLMN1和PLMN5},以此类推。Optionally, there is no priority order among the foregoing multiple network sets. Alternatively, there is an order of priority among the above-mentioned multiple network sets. For example, the first network set is the highest priority network set. For example, {PLMN1 and PLMN2} are a network set with the highest priority, followed by {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, and so on.
在一种可能实现方式中,UDM可以通过SOR-AF来获取SOR信息,其中,SOR 信息包括上述网络集合的信息,这将结合后面的图10进行具体描述。In a possible implementation manner, the UDM may acquire SOR information through SOR-AF, where the SOR information includes the information of the foregoing network set, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 below.
在另一种实现方式中,UDM可以根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片信息来确定网络集合。In another implementation manner, the UDM may determine the network set according to information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
例如,所述UDM配置有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,或者UDM从NSSF(例如,位于HPLMN内的NSSF)获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,然后根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和UE的签约信息确定允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI。允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI可以如前述表3所述。可以理解的是,当UDM从位于HPLMN内的NSSF获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,这意味着要在现有网络架构中增加UDM和NSSF之间的接口或服务化操作。For example, the UDM is configured with the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement, or the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF (for example, the NSSF located in the HPLMN), and then according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement The S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN and the subscription information of the UE determine the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access. The S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access may be as described in Table 3 above. It can be understood that when the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF located in the HPLMN, it means that the interface or service operation between the UDM and the NSSF should be added in the existing network architecture.
然后,UDM根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息和各PLMN支持的S-NSSAI,确定网络集合。Then, the UDM determines the network set according to the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access and the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN.
可选的,UDM可以根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息、各PLMN支持的S-NSSAI和UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID,确定网络集合。例如,步骤902中的请求消息a还携带UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID,UDM据此获知UE当前注册的PLMN,从而选择包括UE当前注册的PLMN的网络集合。举例来说,如果UE当前注册的PLMN为PLMN1,那么网络集合可以包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2}和{PLMN1和PLMN5}中的一项或多项。Optionally, the UDM may determine the network set according to the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN, and the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE. For example, the request message a in step 902 also carries the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE, according to which the UDM learns the PLMN currently registered by the UE, and thus selects a network set including the PLMN currently registered by the UE. For example, if the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1, the network set may include one or more of: {PLMN1 and PLMN2} and {PLMN1 and PLMN5}.
例如,当请求消息a中包含UE能力信息时,UDM根据UE能力信息具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,然后确定网络集合。或者,上述注册请求消息和请求消息a可以不包含UE能力信息,UDM可以默认UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,进而执行后面的操作。For example, when the request message a contains UE capability information, the UDM has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the network set. Alternatively, the above registration request message and request message a may not include UE capability information, and the UDM may default that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, and then performs the following operations.
可选的,UDM也可以根据上述方式生成包含上述网络集合的SOR信息。SOR信息的形式也可参考后面图10的具体描述。Optionally, the UDM may also generate the SOR information including the foregoing network set according to the foregoing manner. The form of the SOR information can also refer to the specific description of FIG. 10 later.
需要说明的是,上述步骤中考虑的UE请求接入的S-NSSAI,是包含在UE签约S-NSSAI中的S-NSSAI。也就是说,不管这个UE请求接入的S-NSSAI在当前PLMN是否被确定为允许接入的S-NSSAI,至少UE的签约S-NSSAI是包括这个S-NSSAI的,或者说,该S-NSSAI对应的网络切片可能可以在其他PLMN被注册。否则,网络侧没有必要为这个S-NSSAI考虑可以注册至的PLMN。换句话说,对于不包括在签约S-NSSAI中的UE请求接入的S-NSSAI,网络设备不需要为其确定PLMN。It should be noted that the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access considered in the above steps is the S-NSSAI included in the UE's subscription S-NSSAI. That is to say, regardless of whether the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access is determined to be the S-NSSAI that allows access in the current PLMN, at least the S-NSSAI of the UE's subscription includes this S-NSSAI, or in other words, the S-NSSAI Network slices corresponding to NSSAI may be registered in other PLMNs. Otherwise, it is not necessary for the network side to consider the PLMN to which this S-NSSAI can be registered. In other words, the network equipment does not need to determine the PLMN for the S-NSSAI for which the UE requests access which is not included in the subscription S-NSSAI.
步骤904,UDM向AMF发送响应消息b,该响应消息b包括与上述网络集合关联的信息。相应的,AMF从UDM接收响应消息b,该响应消息b包括与上述网络集合关联的信息。Step 904, the UDM sends a response message b to the AMF, where the response message b includes the information associated with the above network set. Correspondingly, the AMF receives a response message b from the UDM, where the response message b includes information associated with the aforementioned network set.
例如,当UDM通过步骤903确定了一个网络集合,UDM可以通过步骤904的响应消息b发送与这个网络集合关联的信息。当UDM通过步骤903确定了多个网络集合,UDM可以通过步骤904的响应消息b发送多个网络集合的信息,或者,UDM可以根据各个网络集合的优先级以及UE当前注册的PLMN中的至少一项,发送多个网络集合中部分网络集合的信息。例如,UDM可以发送多个网络集合中优先级最高的一个网络集合的信息,或者,发送包含UE当前注册PLMN的一个或多个网络集合的信 息。For example, when the UDM determines a network set through step 903, the UDM can send information associated with this network set through the response message b in step 904. When the UDM determines multiple network sets in step 903, the UDM can send the information of the multiple network sets through the response message b in step 904, or the UDM can use at least one of the priority of each network set and the PLMN currently registered by the UE. item to send information about some network sets in multiple network sets. For example, the UDM may send information of a network set with the highest priority among multiple network sets, or send information including one or more network sets in which the UE is currently registered with the PLMN.
进一步可选的,UDM还可以根据UE当前注册的PLMN确定与网络集合关联的信息。与网络集合关联的信息可以仅包括UE待额外注册至的PLMN,而不包括UE当前注册的PLMN。例如,UE当前注册的PLMN为PLMN1,网络集合可以包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2},那么与网络集合关联的信息可以仅包括PLMN2的信息。Further optionally, the UDM may also determine the information associated with the network set according to the PLMN currently registered by the UE. The information associated with the network set may only include the PLMN to which the UE is to be additionally registered, but not the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered. For example, the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1, and the network set may include: {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, then the information associated with the network set may only include the information of PLMN2.
可选的,UDM还向AMF发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示UE注册至多个PLMN。例如,UDM可以通过步骤904的响应消息b向AMF发送上述与网络集合关联的信息和指示信息。Optionally, the UDM also sends indication information to the AMF, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs. For example, the UDM may send the above-mentioned information and indication information associated with the network set to the AMF through the response message b in step 904 .
例如,UDM可以通过调用AMF的服务化操作的方式,向AMF发送上述信息。For example, the UDM can send the above information to the AMF by invoking the service operation of the AMF.
步骤905,AMF向UE发送注册接受消息,该注册接受消息中包括上述与网络集合关联的信息。Step 905, the AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the UE, where the registration acceptance message includes the above-mentioned information associated with the network set.
可选的,注册接受消息还包括上述指示信息。Optionally, the registration acceptance message further includes the above indication information.
可选的,注册接受消息还包括allowed NSSAI和rejected NSSAI中的至少一项。或者,步骤905中AMF向UE发送的消息可以是注册拒绝消息(图中未示出),该注册拒绝消息中包括上述与网络集合关联的信息。例如,结合前面表3的举例,当前PLMN为上述任一PLMN时,allowed NSSAI和rejected NSSAI可以如表4所述。Optionally, the registration acceptance message further includes at least one of allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI. Alternatively, the message sent by the AMF to the UE in step 905 may be a registration rejection message (not shown in the figure), and the registration rejection message includes the above-mentioned information associated with the network set. For example, with reference to the examples in Table 3 above, when the current PLMN is any of the above PLMNs, the allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI may be as described in Table 4.
表4Table 4
PLMN IDPLMN ID Allowed NSSAIAllowed NSSAI Rejected NSSAIRejected NSSAI
PLMN1PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1S-NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 2S-NSSAI 2
PLMN2PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2S-NSSAI 2 S-NSSAI 1S-NSSAI 1
PLMN3PLMN3 S-NSSAI 1S-NSSAI 1 S-NSSAI 2S-NSSAI 2
PLMN4PLMN4 nullnull S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 2S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 2
PLMN5PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2S-NSSAI 2 S-NSSAI 1S-NSSAI 1
例如,AMF向RAN(图9中未示出)发送注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息,RAN收到注册接受消息后向UE发送该注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息。For example, the AMF sends a registration accept message/registration rejection message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 9 ), and the RAN sends the registration accept message/registration rejection message to the UE after receiving the registration accept message.
相应的,UE通过RAN从AMF接收注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息。Correspondingly, the UE receives the Registration Accept message/Registration Reject message from the AMF through the RAN.
步骤906,UE注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Step 906, the UE registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
需要说明的是,本申请中的“注册至多个PLMN”可以理解为“同时注册至多个PLMN”,例如,同时注册至网络集合中的多个PLMN。“同时”并不一定是指UE要在同一时间执行注册至多个PLMN的动作,UE可以先注册至多个PLMN中的第一PLMN,然后注册至多个PLMN中的第二PLMN,并且,当UE注册至第二PLMN时,UE在第一PLMN保持注册的状态。也就是说,UE在多个PLMN内都保持注册的状态。It should be noted that "registering with multiple PLMNs" in this application may be understood as "registering with multiple PLMNs at the same time", for example, simultaneously registering with multiple PLMNs in the network set. "Concurrently" does not necessarily mean that the UE needs to perform the action of registering with multiple PLMNs at the same time. The UE can first register with the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs, and then register with the second PLMN among the multiple PLMNs, and when the UE registers When arriving at the second PLMN, the UE remains registered in the first PLMN. That is, the UE remains registered in multiple PLMNs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当UE通过步骤905接收到一个网络集合,UE可以据此注册至该个网络集合中的PLMN。需要说明的是,若UE通过上述步骤901至905的注册流程已经注册至多个PLMN中的第一PLMN,那么UE只需额外注册至多个PLMN中除第一PLMN外的其他的PLMN;否则,UE可以额外注册至这多个PLMN。In a possible implementation manner, when the UE receives a network set through step 905, the UE may register with the PLMN in the network set accordingly. It should be noted that, if the UE has already registered with the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs through the registration process of the above steps 901 to 905, the UE only needs to additionally register with other PLMNs except the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs; otherwise, the UE Additional registrations to these multiple PLMNs are possible.
举例来说,UE收到的与网络集合关联的信息为{PLMN1和PLMN2},而UE通过上述步骤901至905的注册流程已经注册至PLMN1,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN2。 类似的,若UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN2,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN1。若UE当前注册至的是PLMN3、PLMN4或PLMN5,则UE注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。在这种情况下,UE可以从当前的PLMN去注册。For example, the information associated with the network set received by the UE is {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, and the UE has already registered with PLMN1 through the registration process of steps 901 to 905, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当UE通过步骤905接收到多个网络集合,UE可以首先从多个网络集合中确定一个网络集合(称为第一网络集合)。例如,UE可以随机从多个网络集合中确定一个网络集合作为第一网络集合,或者,UE可以确定多个网络集合中优先级最高的网络集合作为第一网络集合,或者,UE可以确定一个包含已注册的PLMN的网络集合作为第一网络集合,或者,UE可以结合各个网络集合的优先级和已注册的PLMN的网络集合来确定第一网络集合。In another possible implementation manner, when the UE receives multiple network sets through step 905, the UE may first determine a network set (referred to as the first network set) from the multiple network sets. For example, the UE may randomly determine a network set from multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets as the first network set, or the UE may determine a network set containing The network set of registered PLMNs is used as the first network set, or the UE may determine the first network set by combining the priority of each network set and the network set of registered PLMNs.
举例来说,UE收到的与网络集合关联的信息包括{PLMN1和PLMN2},{PLMN1和PLMN5},{PLMN2和PLMN3},{PLMN3和PLMN5}。UE可以根据上述任一方式选择第一网络集合,例如,{PLMN1和PLMN2}。For example, the information associated with the network set received by the UE includes {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, {PLMN2 and PLMN3}, {PLMN3 and PLMN5}. The UE may select the first set of networks according to any of the above methods, eg {PLMN1 and PLMN2}.
在UE确定第一网络集合后,UE可以据此注册至第一网络集合中的PLMN。UE如何操作可以参考前一种实现方式中的描述,此处不再赘述。After the UE determines the first network set, the UE may register with the PLMN in the first network set accordingly. For how the UE operates, reference may be made to the description in the previous implementation manner, which will not be repeated here.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当UE通过步骤905接收到与多个网络集合关联的信息中仅包括了待UE注册至PLMN的信息,也就是说,UE通过步骤905接收到的与多个网络集合关联的信息已经不包含UE已注册至的网络,那么UE可以额外注册至该信息中的PLMN。In another possible implementation manner, when the UE receives the information associated with multiple network sets in step 905, only the information that the UE is to be registered to the PLMN is included, that is, the information received by the UE in step 905 is the same as that of the multiple network sets. The information associated with each network set already does not include the network to which the UE has registered, so the UE may additionally register with the PLMN in the information.
不管是上述任一方式,UE最终都注册至了能够支持UE请求的多个网络切片的多个PLMN。当UE注册至上述多个PLMN后,即可通过注册至的多个PLMN使用请求的多个网络切片。例如,当UE想使用网络切片2提供的业务时,建立与网络切片2对应的会话,然后通过该会话接入该网络切片2。Regardless of any of the above methods, the UE eventually registers with multiple PLMNs capable of supporting multiple network slices requested by the UE. After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the multiple requested network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to. For example, when the UE wants to use the service provided by the network slice 2, a session corresponding to the network slice 2 is established, and then the UE accesses the network slice 2 through the session.
通过此方法,UE可以根据请求接入的多个网络切片,注册至多个PLMN,使得UE请求接入的多个网络切片在多个PLMN的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。Through this method, the UE can register to multiple PLMNs according to the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, so that the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access can be used in the combination of multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements that the UE expects to use. The demand for network slicing provides better services for users and improves user experience.
如上所述,该方法还可以适用于同一个PLMN(HPLMN或VPLMN)内多个子网的场景。该场景下的方法同样涉及UE、AMF和UDM之间的交互。UE可以是图5或图6中的UE,AMF可以是图5或图6中的AMF,UDM可以是图5或图6中的UDM。类似的,UDM可以确定一个或多个网络集合,其中每个网络集合包括多个子网,UE请求接入的多个网络切片被多个子网中的至少一个子网所支持,那么,当UE收到与网络集合关联的信息后,可以注册至多个子网,通过注册至的多个子网使用请求接入的多个网络切片。这样,UE请求接入的多个网络切片在多个子网的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。As mentioned above, the method can also be applied to scenarios of multiple subnets within the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN). The method in this scenario also involves the interaction between UE, AMF and UDM. The UE may be the UE in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 , the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 , and the UDM may be the UDM in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 . Similarly, the UDM may determine one or more network sets, where each network set includes multiple subnets, and multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are supported by at least one of the multiple subnets, then, when the UE receives After obtaining the information associated with the network set, you can register to multiple subnets, and use the multiple network slices requested for access through the multiple subnets registered to. In this way, multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination of multiple subnets, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
如上所述,当该方法应用于跨PLMN的漫游场景的场景,网络集合关联的信息可以通过SOR信息的方式来实现,其中,SOR信息既可以由UDM生成,或者,也可以由UDM请求SOR-AF生成。图10将以UDM请求SOR-AF生成SOR信息为例进行描述。图10将结合图9进行描述。例如,该方法可以包括以下步骤:As mentioned above, when the method is applied to a roaming scenario across PLMNs, the information associated with the network set can be implemented by means of SOR information, wherein the SOR information can either be generated by the UDM, or can also be requested by the UDM for SOR- AF generation. FIG. 10 will be described by taking the UDM requesting the SOR-AF to generate the SOR information as an example. FIG. 10 will be described in conjunction with FIG. 9 . For example, the method may include the following steps:
步骤1001,UDM向SOR-AF发送UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。例如, 该UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以为图9中步骤902的请求消息a中包括的UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。Step 1001, the UDM sends the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access to the SOR-AF. For example, the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, which is included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
例如,如果上述UE的签约信息指示:在一个VPLMN初始注册的情况下向UE提供SOR信息,UDM确定要获取SOR信息,进而执行上述步骤1001。For example, if the above-mentioned subscription information of the UE indicates that SOR information is provided to the UE in the case of initial registration of a VPLMN, the UDM determines to obtain the SOR information, and then executes the above-mentioned step 1001 .
可选的,UDM还可以向SOR-AF发送UE能力信息。例如,该UE能力信息可以为图9中步骤902的请求消息a中包括的UE能力信息。Optionally, the UDM may also send UE capability information to the SOR-AF. For example, the UE capability information may be the UE capability information included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
可选的,UDM还可以向SOR-AF发送UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。例如,该UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID可以为图9中步骤902的请求消息a中包括的UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。Optionally, the UDM may also send the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE to the SOR-AF. For example, the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE may be the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE included in the request message a in step 902 in FIG. 9 .
步骤1002,SOR-AF根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息生成SOR信息。该SOR信息可以指示网络集合。网络集合可参考图9中的步骤903的描述。Step 1002, the SOR-AF generates SOR information according to information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. The SOR information may indicate a network set. The network set may refer to the description of step 903 in FIG. 9 .
例如,SOR-AF配置有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI;或者,SOR-AF从NSSF获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI。然后,SOR-AF根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和UE的签约信息确定允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,进而根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息和各PLMN支持的S-NSSAI,生成SOR信息。For example, the SOR-AF configures the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement; or, the SOR-AF obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF. Then, the SOR-AF determines the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the UE, and then according to the information and information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. The S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN generates SOR information.
SOR信息可以包含一个或多个网络集合,其中,每个网络集合包括多个PLMN,UE请求接入的每个网络切片被多个PLMN中的至少一个PLMN所支持。The SOR information may include one or more network sets, wherein each network set includes multiple PLMNs, and each network slice that the UE requests to access is supported by at least one PLMN among the multiple PLMNs.
如上所述,UE请求接入两个网络切片:网络切片1和网络切片2。那么在每个网络集合中包括至少两个PLMN,其中一个PLMN支持网络切片1,另一个PLMN支持网络切片2。例如,结合上述表3的例子,该SOR信息可以包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2},{PLMN1和PLMN5},{PLMN2和PLMN3},{PLMN3和PLMN5}中的一项或多项。其中,{}中的PLMN表示一个网络集合中的多个PLMN。或者,网络集合可以包括{PLMN1和(PLMN2,PLMN5)},()中的PLMN为支持同一种网络切片的PLMN。As mentioned above, the UE requests access to two network slices: network slice 1 and network slice 2. Then each network set includes at least two PLMNs, one of which supports network slice 1 and the other PLMN supports network slice 2. For example, in conjunction with the examples in Table 3 above, the SOR information may include one or more of: {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, {PLMN2 and PLMN3}, {PLMN3 and PLMN5}. Wherein, the PLMNs in {} represent multiple PLMNs in a network set. Alternatively, the network set may include {PLMN1 and (PLMN2, PLMN5)}, and the PLMNs in ( ) are PLMNs that support the same network slice.
可选的,上述SOR信息中多个网络集合之间不存在优先级的顺序。或者,上述SOR信息中多个网络集合之间存在优先级的顺序。例如,SOR信息中排在第一位的网络集合为优先级最高的网络集合。举例来说,{PLMN1和PLMN2}为优先级最高的一个网络集合,其次为{PLMN1和PLMN5},以此类推。Optionally, there is no priority order among multiple network sets in the above SOR information. Alternatively, there is an order of priority among multiple network sets in the above SOR information. For example, the network set ranked first in the SOR information is the network set with the highest priority. For example, {PLMN1 and PLMN2} are a network set with the highest priority, followed by {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, and so on.
可选的,SOR-AF可以根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息、各PLMN支持的S-NSSAI和UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID,确定SOR信息。例如,SOR-AF可以选择包括UE当前注册的PLMN的网络集合作为SOR信息中的网络集合。举例来说,如果UE当前注册的PLMN为PLMN1,那么SOR信息可以包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2}和{PLMN1和PLMN5}中的一项或多项。Optionally, the SOR-AF may determine the SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN, and the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE. For example, the SOR-AF may select the network set including the PLMN with which the UE is currently registered as the network set in the SOR information. For example, if the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1, the SOR information may include one or more of: {PLMN1 and PLMN2} and {PLMN1 and PLMN5}.
可选的,若SOR-AF收到了UE能力信息,SOR-AF可以根据携带UE能力信息确定UE具有接入多个PLMN的能力,进而确定SOR信息。或者,SOR-AF可以默认UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,从而生成SOR信息。Optionally, if the SOR-AF receives the UE capability information, the SOR-AF may determine that the UE has the capability to access multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the SOR information. Alternatively, the SOR-AF may generate SOR information by defaulting that the UE has the ability to register with multiple PLMNs.
不管网络集合是上述哪一种形式,以上SOR信息中的几种形式可以以优选PLMN或接入技术的组合的列表来呈现,或者,也可以以将这些信息进行安全封装后得到的安全包来呈现。Regardless of which of the above forms the network set is in, several forms of the above SOR information can be presented in a list of preferred PLMN or access technology combinations, or can also be presented in a secure package obtained by securely encapsulating the information. render.
步骤1003,SOR-AF向UDM发送上述SOR信息。Step 1003, the SOR-AF sends the above SOR information to the UDM.
可选的,SOR-AF还向UDM发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示UE注册至多个PLMN。Optionally, the SOR-AF also sends indication information to the UDM, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
相应的,UDM从SOR-AF收到SOR信息,根据SOR信息确定网络集合,然后执行如图9中步骤904,即通过图9中的步骤904和步骤905向UE传递与网络集合关联的信息。也就是说,步骤905中的注册接受消息中包括SOR信息。UE收到SOR信息后,通过步骤906注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Correspondingly, the UDM receives the SOR information from the SOR-AF, determines the network set according to the SOR information, and then executes step 904 in FIG. That is, the registration acceptance message in step 905 includes SOR information. After receiving the SOR information, the UE registers to at least one of the multiple networks through step 906 .
例如,UE根据SOR信息注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络可以通过如下方式实现:For example, the registration of the UE to at least one of the multiple networks according to the SOR information may be implemented in the following manner:
UE根据接收到的包含上述网络集合信息的SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器或更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器。然后,UE根据上述选择器来执行PLMN选择并注册至多个PLMN。The UE assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information including the foregoing network set information. Then, the UE performs PLMN selection according to the above selector and registers with multiple PLMNs.
具体来说,当UE根据接收到的SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,UE可根据更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器来进行PLMN的选择和注册。或者,UE可以根据SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器。当SOR信息被用于更新用户控制的PLMN选择器时,UE将SOR信息以用户可读的形式向用户提供(例如,向用户显示),然后用户来选择注册至的PLMN。在一种实现方式中,UE可以在用户界面显示各个PLMN和各自支持的网络切片的对应关系,用户可以根据自己的喜好进行选择。UE收到用户选择的注册哪些PLMN的指令后,更新用户控制的PLMN选择器。例如,用户根据UE提供的信息,选择PLMN1和PLMN2,则UE更新用户控制的PLMN选择器为PLMN1和PLMN2。当UE使用用户控制的PLMN选择器时,则可以注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。此外,若当前UE已经注册至PLMN1,则只要额外注册至PLMN2。UE如何根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器和用户控制的PLMN选择器的原理是类似的,以下将以UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器为例进行描述。Specifically, when the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information, the UE can select and register the PLMN according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector. Alternatively, the UE may assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information. When the SOR information is used to update the user-controlled PLMN selector, the UE provides the SOR information in a user-readable form to the user (eg, displayed to the user), and the user then selects the PLMN to register to. In an implementation manner, the UE may display the correspondence between each PLMN and the network slices supported by each on the user interface, and the user may select according to his/her own preference. After receiving the instruction of which PLMNs to be registered selected by the user, the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the user. For example, if the user selects PLMN1 and PLMN2 according to the information provided by the UE, the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the user to PLMN1 and PLMN2. When the UE uses the user-controlled PLMN selector, it can register to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In addition, if the current UE has already registered with PLMN1, it only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. The principles of how the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector and the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information are similar. The following will take the UE updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information as an example for description.
当SOR信息包括一个网络集合,UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,UE根据更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器注册至该网络集合中的PLMN。例如,SOR信息包括一个网络集合的信息。举例来说,当网络集合包括PLMN1和PLMN2,更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器如表5所示。UE可以根据上述方法注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。When the SOR information includes a network set, the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and the UE registers with the PLMN in the network set according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector. For example, the SOR information includes information for a network set. For example, when the network set includes PLMN1 and PLMN2, the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 5. The UE can register to PLMN1 and PLMN2 according to the above method.
表5table 5
运营商控制的PLMN选择器Operator controlled PLMN selector
{PLMN1,PLMN2}{PLMN1, PLMN2}
当SOR信息包括至少两个网络集合的信息,UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,UE根据更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器选择一个网络集合并注册。例如,SOR信息中的至少两个网络集合包括:{PLMN1和PLMN2},{PLMN1和PLMN5},{PLMN2和PLMN3},{PLMN3和PLMN5}。更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器如表6所示。When the SOR information includes information of at least two network sets, the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and the UE selects a network set and registers according to the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector. For example, the at least two network sets in the SOR information include: {PLMN1 and PLMN2}, {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, {PLMN2 and PLMN3}, {PLMN3 and PLMN5}. The updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 6.
表6Table 6
运营商控制的PLMN选择器Operator controlled PLMN selector
{PLMN1,PLMN2}{PLMN1, PLMN2}
{PLMN1,PLMN5}{PLMN1, PLMN5}
{PLMN2,PLMN3}{PLMN2, PLMN3}
{PLMN3,PLMN5}{PLMN3, PLMN5}
在一种可能的实现方式中,当至少两个网络集合中的每一个网络集合不存在优先级的顺序,UE随机选择一个网络集合,例如,UE选择第一个网络集合中的PLMN并注册。即,UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2并注册。In a possible implementation manner, when each of the at least two network sets does not have a priority order, the UE randomly selects a network set, for example, the UE selects a PLMN in the first network set and registers. That is, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2 and register.
可选的,UE可以考虑当前已经注册至的PLMN来选择一个网络集合,即,选择包含当前已经注册至的PLMN的一个网络集合。举例来说,若UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN1,则UE可以选择{PLMN1和PLMN2}或{PLMN1和PLMN5},也就是说,UE可以额外注册至PLMN2或PLMN5。Optionally, the UE may select a network set considering the currently registered PLMN, that is, select a network set including the currently registered PLMN. For example, if the UE has already registered to PLMN1 through the above registration process, the UE can select {PLMN1 and PLMN2} or {PLMN1 and PLMN5}, that is, the UE can additionally register to PLMN2 or PLMN5.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的网络集合根据优先级降序排列。UE注册至优先级最高的一个网络集合。如上所述,{PLMN1和PLMN2}为优先级最高的一个网络集合。因此,UE注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。若UE当前已经注册至PLMN1,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN2。类似的,若UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN2,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN1。若UE当前注册至的是PLMN3、PLMN4或PLMN5,则UE重新注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。在这种情况下,UE可以从当前的PLMN去注册。In another possible implementation manner, the network sets in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE registers with the network set with the highest priority. As mentioned above, {PLMN1 and PLMN2} are a network set with the highest priority. Therefore, the UE registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
进一步可选的,UE可以选择运营商控制的PLMN选择器中包含当前已经注册至的PLMN的优先级最高的一个网络集合,例如,若UE当前已经注册至PLMN1,{PLMN1和PLMN2}为运营商控制的PLMN选择器中包含当前已经注册至的PLMN的优先级最高的一个网络集合,UE只要额外注册至PLMN2。Further optionally, the UE may select a network set with the highest priority that includes the PLMN currently registered to in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator. For example, if the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, {PLMN1 and PLMN2} are the operators. The controlled PLMN selector includes a network set with the highest priority of the currently registered PLMN, and the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2.
可以理解的是,当SOR信息为安全包的形式,UE先对该安全包解封装,然后根据上述任一方式来选择并注册至PLMN,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that when the SOR information is in the form of a security package, the UE first decapsulates the security package, and then selects and registers with the PLMN according to any of the above methods, which will not be repeated here.
当UE注册至上述多个PLMN后,即可通过注册至的多个PLMN使用请求的多个网络切片。After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the multiple requested network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to.
通过此方法,UE可以根据收到的SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器或更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,当UE根据更新后的选择器选择待接入的PLMN时,就有机会注册至多个PLMN,使得UE请求接入的多个网络切片有机会在多个PLMN的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。Through this method, the UE can assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information. When the UE selects the PLMN to be accessed according to the updated selector, it has the opportunity to register to multiple PLMNs, so that multiple network slices that the UE requests to access have the opportunity to be used in the combination of multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices that the UE expects to use, provide better services for users, and improve the user experience.
此外,在以上各实施例中,在UE收到SOR信息之后,UDM可以再次更新SOR信息,并再次向UE下发更新的SOR信息,本申请在此并不限制。In addition, in the above embodiments, after the UE receives the SOR information, the UDM may update the SOR information again, and deliver the updated SOR information to the UE again, which is not limited in this application.
图11所示为本申请提供的一种注册至多个网络方法的另一流程交互示意图。该示意图将结合图9和图10进行描述。图11涉及网络设备和终端设备之间的交互。例如,网络设备可以为图9或图10中的UDM,终端设备可以为图9中的UE。可选的,该交 互还可以涉及AMF,AMF可以为图9中的AMF。例如,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another process interaction of a method for registering to multiple networks provided by the present application. This schematic will be described in conjunction with FIGS. 9 and 10 . Figure 11 relates to the interaction between network equipment and terminal equipment. For example, the network device may be the UDM in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 , and the terminal device may be the UE in FIG. 9 . Optionally, the interaction may also involve an AMF, and the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 9 . For example, the method includes the following steps:
步骤1101,终端设备向网络设备发送请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。相应的,网络设备从终端设备接收请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。Step 1101: The terminal device sends information of multiple network slices to which access is requested to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives from the terminal device information of multiple network slices that are requested to be accessed.
例如,网络设备可以是UDM。UDM可以通过AMF从终端设备接收上述请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。For example, the network device may be a UDM. The UDM may receive the information of the multiple network slices that are requested to be accessed from the terminal device through the AMF.
例如,请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以是终端设备requested NSSAI。例如,终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,终端设备requested NSSAI包括网络切片1的S-NSSAI 1和网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。该请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可参考图9中的步骤901中的描述。For example, the information of multiple network slices to which access is requested may be the terminal device requested NSSAI. For example, the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the NSSAI requested by the terminal device includes S-NSSAI 1 of network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 of network slice 2. For the information of the multiple network slices for which access is requested, reference may be made to the description in step 901 in FIG. 9 .
可选的,终端设备向网络设备发送终端设备能力信息。该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。例如,该能力信息具体用于指示终端设备中的SIM卡具有注册至多个网络的能力。所述终端设备能力信息可参考图9中的步骤901中的描述。Optionally, the terminal device sends the terminal device capability information to the network device. The capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks. For example, the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM card in the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks. For the terminal device capability information, reference may be made to the description in step 901 in FIG. 9 .
对于步骤1101的其他细节,可参考图9中的步骤901和步骤902中的描述。For other details of step 1101, reference may be made to the descriptions in step 901 and step 902 in FIG. 9 .
步骤1102,网络设备根据所述请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。Step 1102, the network device determines a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices according to the information of the plurality of network slices for which access is requested, wherein each network slice in the plurality of network slices is Supported by at least one of the multiple networks.
例如,多个网络可以是指多个PLMN。或者,多个网络可以是指一个PLMN下的多个子网,例如,子网可以是指非公共网络NPN。多个子网可以是HPLMN下的多个子网,或者,可以是VPLMN下的多个子网。For example, multiple networks may refer to multiple PLMNs. Alternatively, the multiple networks may refer to multiple subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnets may refer to a non-public network NPN. The multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN.
网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络可以包括以下几种情况:The determination by the network device of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices may include the following situations:
一种可选的情况,网络设备确定一个网络集合,该网络集合中包括上述多个网络,终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被网络集合中的多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持,换句话说,网络集合包括分别支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的多个网络。例如,所述一个网络集合包括第一网络和第二网络,其中,第一网络支持网络切片1,第二网络支持网络切片2。In an optional situation, the network device determines a network set, the network set includes the above-mentioned multiple networks, and each network slice in the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access is replaced by a network slice in the multiple networks in the network set. Supported by at least one network, in other words, the network set includes multiple networks that respectively support multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. For example, the one network set includes a first network and a second network, wherein the first network supports network slice 1 and the second network supports network slice 2.
一种可选的情况,网络设备确定多个网络集合,其中,终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被多个网络集合中每个网络集合中的多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持,换句话说,多个网络集合中的每个网络集合包括分别支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的多个网络。例如,网络设备确定多个网络集合,其中,多个网络集合中的第一个网络集合包括第一网络和第二网络。可选的,所述第一个网络集合在所述多个网络集合中的优先级最高。In an optional situation, the network device determines multiple network sets, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access is replaced by a network slice in the multiple networks in each of the multiple network sets. Supported by at least one network, in other words, each of the multiple network sets includes multiple networks that respectively support multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. For example, the network device determines a plurality of network sets, wherein a first network set of the plurality of network sets includes a first network and a second network. Optionally, the first network set has the highest priority among the multiple network sets.
可选的,以上的几种情况中网络集合可以指示除终端设备已注册至的网络外的其他网络,也就是说,可以不包括当前终端设备已注册至的网络。例如,当终端设备已经注册至第一网络,那么所述网络集合指示的是排除第一网络外的其他网络的信息。Optionally, in the above several situations, the network set may indicate other networks except the network to which the terminal device has been registered, that is, the network to which the current terminal device has been registered may not be included. For example, when the terminal device has been registered with the first network, the network set indicates information excluding other networks except the first network.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备向漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;网络设备从SOR-AF装置接收漫游优选SOR信息,网络设备根据SOR信息确定多个网络。也就是说,SOR-AF装置根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来确定多个网络,并通过SOR信息的方式反馈给网络设备。例如,此实施方式可以适 用于上述漫游场景。该实施方式的细节可参考图10的描述。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device sends information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus; the network The device receives the roaming preference SOR information from the SOR-AF device, and the network device determines a plurality of networks according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus determines multiple networks according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, and feeds it back to the network device by means of SOR information. For example, this embodiment can be applied to the roaming scenario described above. Details of this embodiment can be referred to the description of FIG. 10 .
或者,在另一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:网络设备获取对应信息,对应信息用于指示允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备根据对应信息和终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络。例如,网络设备可以先从NSSF或本地配置的信息中获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和终端设备的签约信息确定上述对应关系。也就是说,网络设备获取了允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,而后由网络设备根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,来确定多个网络,多个网络切片中的每个网络切片均被多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。该实施方式可参考图9中步骤903的描述。Or, in another possible implementation manner, the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, where the corresponding information is used to indicate the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. The network slice supported by each network in the registered network; the network device determines multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices according to the corresponding information and the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. For example, the network device may first obtain the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with a roaming agreement from the NSSF or locally configured information, and determine the above correspondence according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with a roaming agreement and the subscription information of the terminal device. That is to say, the network device acquires the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then the network device obtains information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access according to the information to determine a plurality of networks, each of the plurality of network slices being supported by at least one of the plurality of networks. For this embodiment, reference may be made to the description of step 903 in FIG. 9 .
对于步骤1102的其他细节,可参考图9中的步骤903中的描述。For other details of step 1102, reference may be made to the description in step 903 in FIG. 9 .
步骤1103,网络设备向终端设备发送多个网络关联的信息。相应的,终端设备从网络设备接收所述多个网络关联的信息。Step 1103, the network device sends a plurality of network associated information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the plurality of network associated information from the network device.
多个网络关联的信息可参考图9中步骤904的描述。For information related to multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of step 904 in FIG. 9 .
例如,在漫游场景下,UDM网络设备可以向终端设备发送SOR信息,所述SOR信息包括所述与所述多个网络关联的信息。For example, in a roaming scenario, the UDM network device may send SOR information to the terminal device, where the SOR information includes the information associated with the multiple networks.
例如,UDM通过AMF向终端设备发送多个网络关联的信息,终端设备通过AMF从UDM接收多个网络关联的信息。For example, the UDM sends multiple network associated information to the terminal device through the AMF, and the terminal device receives multiple network associated information from the UDM through the AMF.
可选的,在网络设备确定多个网络之后,网络设备先确定多个网络关联的信息,然后向终端设备发送多个网络关联的信息。Optionally, after the network device determines multiple networks, the network device first determines the information associated with the multiple networks, and then sends the information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device.
例如,所述多个网络关联的信息指示所述多个网络。或者,当多个网络中包括终端设备当前注册至的第一网络,所述多个网络关联的信息包括所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络的信息。也就是说,所述多个网络关联的信息可以不包括终端设备当前注册至的网络。For example, the information associated with the plurality of networks indicates the plurality of networks. Alternatively, when the multiple networks include the first network to which the terminal device is currently registered, the information associated with the multiple networks includes information of at least one network in the multiple networks except the first network. That is, the information associated with the multiple networks may not include the network to which the terminal device is currently registered.
如前所述,网络设备可以确定一个或多个网络集合,因此,在步骤1103中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送与一个或多个网络集合关联的信息,其中,每个网络集合都指示多个网络或多个网络中除终端设备当前注册的第一网络外的至少一个网络。As mentioned above, the network device may determine one or more network sets, therefore, in step 1103, the network device may send information associated with the one or more network sets to the terminal device, wherein each network set indicates multiple At least one network in the network or multiple networks except the first network currently registered by the terminal device.
多个网络关联的信息的其他细节可参考图9中步骤904的描述。For other details of the information associated with multiple networks, reference may be made to the description of step 904 in FIG. 9 .
进一步可选的,网络设备还向终端设备发送指示所述终端设备注册至多个网络的指示信息。该指示信息中的多个网络可以为泛指的多个网络。Further optionally, the network device further sends, to the terminal device, indication information indicating that the terminal device is registered with multiple networks. The multiple networks in the indication information may refer to multiple networks in general.
对于步骤1103的其他细节,可参考图9中的步骤904至步骤905中的描述。For other details of step 1103, reference may be made to the descriptions in steps 904 to 905 in FIG. 9 .
步骤1104,终端设备根据多个网络关联的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Step 1104: The terminal device registers with at least one network among the multiple networks according to the information associated with the multiple networks.
注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络是指:若所述终端设备已注册至所述多个网络中的第一网络,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。Registering to at least one of the multiple networks means: if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks except the first network at least one network; or, the terminal device registers with the multiple networks.
例如,多个网络关联的信息指示上述第一网络和第二网络。当终端设备已通过上述步骤注册至第一网络,那么终端设备根据收到的多个网络关联的信息再注册至第二 网络。否则,所述终端设备根据所述多个网络的信息注册至第一网络和第二网络。For example, the information associated with a plurality of networks indicates the above-mentioned first network and second network. When the terminal device has been registered to the first network through the above steps, the terminal device re-registers to the second network according to the received information associated with multiple networks. Otherwise, the terminal device registers with the first network and the second network according to the information of the multiple networks.
例如,该步骤包括以下几种情况:For example, this step includes the following situations:
在一种可选的情况中,当所述多个网络信息包括一个网络集合的信息,所述一个网络集合包括所述第一网络和所述第二网络,所述终端设备注册至一个网络集合中的网络。在另一种可选的情况中,当所述多个网络信息包括多个网络集合的信息,所述终端设备根据多个网络信息选择多个网络集合中的一个网络集合并注册至该网络集合中的网络,例如,终端设备选择多个网络集合中的第一网络集合并注册至第一网络集合的网络,所述第一网络集合包括所述第一网络和所述第二网络。可选的,第一网络集合是多个网络集合中优先级最高的网络集合,即,所述终端设备注册至优先级最高的网络集合中的网络。In an optional situation, when the multiple network information includes information of one network set, the one network set includes the first network and the second network, and the terminal device registers with one network set in the network. In another optional situation, when the multiple network information includes information of multiple network sets, the terminal device selects one of the multiple network sets according to the multiple network information and registers with the network set For example, the terminal device selects a first network set among multiple network sets and registers with the network in the first network set, where the first network set includes the first network and the second network. Optionally, the first network set is the network set with the highest priority among the multiple network sets, that is, the terminal device registers with the network in the network set with the highest priority.
例如,上述描述可以适用于终端设备直接根据接收到的多个网络的信息进行注册至多个网络的情况。除此之外,上述描述还可以适用于终端设备根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器或辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器的情况。可选的,终端设备根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器或辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器,然后根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络。例如,当上述描述还可以适用于终端设备根据SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的网络选择器时,所述终端设备根据所述多个网络信息向用户提示第三信息,所述第三信息用于指示用户选择多个网络;所述终端设备接收所述用户的指令,根据所述指令注册至所述多个网络。For example, the above description can be applied to the case where the terminal device directly registers with the multiple networks according to the received information of the multiple networks. Besides, the above description can also be applied to the case where the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information. Optionally, the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and then registers with the at least one of the networks. For example, when the above description is also applicable to the terminal device assisting in updating the network selector controlled by the user according to the SOR information, the terminal device prompts the user with third information according to the plurality of network information, and the third information is used to indicate The user selects multiple networks; the terminal device receives an instruction from the user, and registers with the multiple networks according to the instruction.
对于步骤1104的其他细节,可参考图9中步骤906的描述。For other details of step 1104, reference may be made to the description of step 906 in FIG. 9 .
根据上述方案,网络设备确定能够支持请求接入的多个网络切片的多个网络,并向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息,使得终端设备可以注册至该多个网络,终端设备通过注册至的多个网络来使用终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片,从而满足终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。According to the above solution, the network device determines multiple networks capable of supporting multiple network slices requested for access, and sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can register with the multiple networks, and the terminal device can register with the multiple networks. It uses multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access, so as to meet the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the terminal device, better provide services to users, and improve user experience.
图12为本申请提供的另一种注册至多个网络方法的流程交互示意图。注册至多个网络可以是注册至多个PLMN,也可以是注册至一个PLMN下的多个子网。以下将以注册至多个PLMN为例进行描述。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks provided by this application. Registering with multiple networks may be registering with multiple PLMNs, or may be registering with multiple subnets under one PLMN. The following description will be given by taking registration to multiple PLMNs as an example.
该方法涉及UE、AMF和UDM之间的交互。当本方法用于跨PLMN的漫游场景,UE可以是图3或图4中的UE,AMF可以是图3或图4中位于VPLMN中的AMF,UDM可以是图3或图4中位于HPLMN中的UDM。例如,该VPLMN可以是上述表3中的任一PLMN。The method involves interaction between UE, AMF and UDM. When this method is used in a cross-PLMN roaming scenario, the UE may be the UE in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 , the AMF may be the AMF located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 , and the UDM may be the HPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 . UDM. For example, the VPLMN may be any of the PLMNs in Table 3 above.
例如,该方法包括如下步骤:For example, the method includes the following steps:
步骤1201,UE向AMF发送注册请求(registration request)消息。Step 1201, the UE sends a registration request (registration request) message to the AMF.
例如,UE向RAN(图12中未示出)发送注册请求消息,RAN收到注册请求消息后向AMF发送该注册请求消息,例如,RAN可以是图3或图4中位于VPLMN中的RAN。For example, the UE sends a registration request message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 12 ), and the RAN sends the registration request message to the AMF after receiving the registration request message. For example, the RAN may be the RAN located in the VPLMN in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 .
相应的,AMF通过RAN从UE接收注册请求消息。Correspondingly, the AMF receives the registration request message from the UE through the RAN.
在图12的例子中,注册请求消息中可以包括UE能力信息,该能力信息指示UE具有注册至多个网络的能力。例如,该能力信息具体用于指示UE中的SIM具有注册 至多个PLMN的能力。该能力信息可参考图9中步骤901的描述,此处不再赘述。In the example of FIG. 12 , the registration request message may include UE capability information, where the capability information indicates that the UE has the capability to register with multiple networks. For example, the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM in the UE has the capability to register with multiple PLMNs. For the capability information, reference may be made to the description of step 901 in FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here.
在图12的例子中,注册请求消息中可以包括UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以是UE requested NSSAI。例如UE请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,UE requested NSSAI包括标识网络切片1的S-NSSAI 1和标识网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。该UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可参考图9中步骤901的描述,此处不再赘述。In the example of FIG. 12 , the registration request message may include information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. The information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be UE-requested NSSAI. For example, the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE requested NSSAI includes S-NSSAI 1 that identifies network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 that identifies network slice 2. For information about the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, reference may be made to the description of step 901 in FIG. 9 , and details are not repeated here.
此外,该注册请求消息可以包括UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。In addition, the registration request message may include the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE.
此外,该注册请求消息还可以包括注册类型信息,该注册类型信息用于指示此次注册的类型为初始注册。In addition, the registration request message may further include registration type information, where the registration type information is used to indicate that the type of this registration is initial registration.
AMF收到注册请求消息后,执行注册流程中的相应步骤。例如,如果AMF没有该UE的签约信息,AMF向UDM调用获取签约信息的服务化操作,从而获得UE的签约信息。After the AMF receives the registration request message, it executes the corresponding steps in the registration process. For example, if the AMF does not have the subscription information of the UE, the AMF invokes the servitization operation of acquiring the subscription information from the UDM, so as to obtain the subscription information of the UE.
步骤1202,AMF向UDM发送请求消息c。Step 1202, the AMF sends a request message c to the UDM.
可选的,该请求消息c可以包括上述注册请求消息中的信息,例如,请求消息c可以包括UE能力信息,UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息或UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID中的至少一项。例如,UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息为标识网络切片1的S-NSSAI 1和标识网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。Optionally, the request message c may include the information in the above-mentioned registration request message, for example, the request message c may include UE capability information, the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access or the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE. at least one of. For example, the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are S-NSSAI 1 identifying network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 identifying network slice 2.
相应的,UDM从AMF接收请求消息c。Correspondingly, the UDM receives the request message c from the AMF.
例如,AMF可以通过调用UDM的服务化操作的方式,向UDM发送请求消息c。For example, the AMF may send the request message c to the UDM by invoking the service operation of the UDM.
可选的,UDM在收到请求消息c后,先确定当前PLMN不能支持UE请求接入的全部的多个网络切片。例如,当前PLMN为PLMN 1,如上述表3所示,PLMN 1支持S-NSSAI 1标识的网络切片1和S-NSSAI 3标识的网络切片3,并不能支持S-NSSAI 1标识的网络切片2,因此触发UDM执行如下步骤1203。Optionally, after receiving the request message c, the UDM first determines that the current PLMN cannot support all the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. For example, the current PLMN is PLMN 1. As shown in Table 3 above, PLMN 1 supports network slice 1 identified by S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 identified by S-NSSAI 3, but cannot support network slice 2 identified by S-NSSAI 1 , thus triggering the UDM to execute the following step 1203 .
步骤1203,UDM获取网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。Step 1203, the UDM obtains the network set and information of network slices supported by each network in the network set.
与图9类似的,UDM可以确定网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,或者,UDM可以从SOR-AF获取网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。UDM从SOR-AF获取网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息的方法将结合后面的图13进行具体描述,该实现方式适用于跨PLMN的漫游场景。Similar to FIG. 9 , the UDM can determine the network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set, or the UDM can obtain the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the SOR-AF. The method for the UDM to obtain the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set from the SOR-AF will be described in detail with reference to the following Figure 13 , and this implementation is applicable to the cross-PLMN roaming scenario.
上述网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以是网络集合中的PLMN和各PLMN支持的网络切片的关联信息。在一种可能的实现方式中,网络集合中的PLMN为允许UE注册至的PLMN。例如,允许UE注册至的PLMN是指允许UE同时注册至的PLMN。也就是说,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以具有表格的形式,如上述表3所示。或者,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以包括:PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3),PLMN2(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4),PLMN3(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4),PLMN4(S-NSSAI 3、S-NSSAI 5),PLMN5(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5)。例如,PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3)表示PLMN1支持S-NSSAI 1对应的网络切片1以及S-NSSAI 3对应的网络切片3。The information about the network set and the network slice supported by each network in the network set may be the association information of the PLMN in the network set and the network slice supported by each PLMN. In a possible implementation manner, the PLMN in the network set is a PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register. For example, the PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register refers to the PLMN to which the UE is allowed to register at the same time. That is, the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set may be in the form of a table, as shown in Table 3 above. Alternatively, the network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set may include: PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3), PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4) NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN4 (S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5), PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5). For example, PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3) indicates that PLMN1 supports network slice 1 corresponding to S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 corresponding to S-NSSAI 3.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当上述注册请求消息中包括了UE请求接入的多个 网络切片的信息,网络集合中的PLMN为支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片中至少一个网络切片的PLMN。也就是说,不支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片中至少一个网络切片的PLMN不包括在该网络集合中。以上述例子来说,表3的PLMN 4既不能支持UE请求接入的网络切片1,也不能支持UE请求接入的网络切片2。类似的,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以具有表格的形式,如表7所示。或者,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以包括:PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3),PLMN2(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4),PLMN3(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4),PLMN5(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5)。In another possible implementation, when the above registration request message includes information about multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, the PLMN in the network set is at least one network that supports the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. Sliced PLMN. That is to say, a PLMN that does not support at least one of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access is not included in the network set. Taking the above example as an example, the PLMN 4 in Table 3 can neither support the network slice 1 that the UE requests to access, nor the network slice 2 that the UE requests to access. Similarly, the information of the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set may be in the form of a table, as shown in Table 7. Alternatively, the network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set may include: PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3), PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4) NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4), PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5).
表7Table 7
PLMN IDPLMN ID 支持的网络切片Supported network slices
PLMN1PLMN1 S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3
PLMN2PLMN2 S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4
PLMN3PLMN3 S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4
PLMN5PLMN5 S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5
例如,UDM配置有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,或者UDM从NSSF(例如,位于HPLMN内的NSSF)获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,然后根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和UE的签约信息确定允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI。允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI可以如前述表3所述。可以理解的是,当UDM从位于HPLMN内的NSSF获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,这意味着要在现有网络架构中增加UDM和NSSF之间的接口或服务化操作。For example, the UDM is configured with the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement, or the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF (for example, the NSSF located in the HPLMN), and then according to the PLMN with the roaming agreement. The supported S-NSSAI and the UE's subscription information determine the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access. The S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that the UE is allowed to access may be as described in Table 3 above. It can be understood that when the UDM obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF located in the HPLMN, it means that the interface or service operation between the UDM and the NSSF should be added in the existing network architecture.
然后,UDM可以根据请求消息c,确定网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。Then, the UDM can determine the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set according to the request message c.
例如,当请求消息c中包含UE能力信息时,UDM根据UE能力信息具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,然后确定网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。或者,上述注册请求消息和请求消息c可以不包含UE能力信息,UDM可以默认UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,进而执行后面的操作。For example, when the request message c includes UE capability information, the UDM has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set. Alternatively, the above registration request message and request message c may not include UE capability information, and the UDM may default that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, and then performs the following operations.
或者,当请求消息c中包含UE请求接入的网络切片的信息时,UDM根据UE请求接入的网络切片的信息,UDM确定的网络集合中的多个网络与UE请求接入的网络切片的信息关联。这可以参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。Or, when the request message c includes information about the network slice that the UE requests to access, the UDM determines the difference between the multiple networks in the network set determined by the UDM and the network slice that the UE requests to access according to the information about the network slice that the UE requests to access. Information association. For this, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
或者,当请求消息c中包括UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID,UDM可以据此获知UE当前注册的PLMN,从而选择包括UE当前注册的PLMN的网络集合以及网络集合中每个PLMN支持的网络切片。举例来说,如果UE当前注册的PLMN为PLMN1,那么网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息包括的是PLMN2,PLMN3,PLMN4,PLMN5以及各自对应支持的网络切片的信息。Alternatively, when the request message c includes the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE, the UDM can learn the PLMN currently registered by the UE accordingly, so as to select the network set including the PLMN currently registered by the UE and the network slice supported by each PLMN in the network set . For example, if the PLMN currently registered by the UE is PLMN1, the network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set include PLMN2, PLMN3, PLMN4, PLMN5 and the information of the corresponding supported network slices.
可选的,当该实现方式适用于跨PLMN的漫游场景时,UDM也可以根据上述方式生成包含上述网络集合的SOR信息。SOR信息的形式也可参考后面图13的具体描述。Optionally, when this implementation manner is applicable to a cross-PLMN roaming scenario, the UDM may also generate the SOR information including the foregoing network set according to the foregoing manner. The form of the SOR information can also refer to the specific description of FIG. 13 later.
需要说明的是,上述步骤中考虑的UE请求接入的S-NSSAI,是包含在UE签约S-NSSAI中的S-NSSAI。也就是说,不管这个UE请求接入的S-NSSAI在当前PLMN是否被确定为允许接入的S-NSSAI,至少UE的签约S-NSSAI是包括这个S-NSSAI的,或者说,该S-NSSAI对应的网络切片可能可以在其他PLMN被注册。否则,网络侧没有必要为这个S-NSSAI考虑可以注册至的PLMN。换句话说,对于不包括在签约S-NSSAI中的UE请求接入的S-NSSAI,网络设备不需要为其确定PLMN。It should be noted that the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access considered in the above steps is the S-NSSAI included in the UE's subscription S-NSSAI. That is to say, regardless of whether the S-NSSAI that the UE requests to access is determined to be the S-NSSAI that allows access in the current PLMN, at least the S-NSSAI of the UE's subscription includes this S-NSSAI, or in other words, the S-NSSAI Network slices corresponding to NSSAI may be registered in other PLMNs. Otherwise, it is not necessary for the network side to consider the PLMN to which this S-NSSAI can be registered. In other words, the network equipment does not need to determine the PLMN for the S-NSSAI for which the UE requests access which is not included in the subscription S-NSSAI.
步骤1204,UDM向AMF发送响应消息d,响应消息d包括步骤1203中的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。相应的,AMF从UDM接收响应消息d。Step 1204, the UDM sends a response message d to the AMF, where the response message d includes the network set in step 1203 and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the response message d from the UDM.
结合前面步骤1203的描述,在一种可能的实现方式中,UDM可以通过步骤1204的响应消息d发送允许UE注册至的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。也就是说,网络集合中的网络为允许UE注册至的网络。With reference to the description of step 1203, in a possible implementation manner, the UDM may send the network set to which the UE is allowed to register and the information of network slices supported by each network in the network set through the response message d of step 1204. That is, the networks in the network set are the networks to which the UE is allowed to register.
或者,在另一种可能的实现方式中,UDM可以通过步骤1204的响应消息d发送支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。也就是说,网络集合中的每个网络能够支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片,UDM通过响应消息发送这种网络支持的各个网络切片(包括但不限于该网络支持的UE请求接入的网络切片)。进一步可选的,UDM发送的网络集合不包括UE当前注册的网络的信息。Or, in another possible implementation manner, the UDM may send, through the response message d in step 1204, a network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and a network supported by each network in the network set slice information. That is to say, each network in the network set can support at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and the UDM sends each network slice (including but not limited to the network slices supported by the network) through a response message. The network slice that the UE requests to access). Further optionally, the network set sent by the UDM does not include the information of the network currently registered by the UE.
可选的,UDM还向AMF发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示UE注册至多个PLMN。例如,UDM可以通过步骤1204的响应消息d向AMF发送上述与网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的的信息和指示信息。Optionally, the UDM also sends indication information to the AMF, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs. For example, the UDM may send the above-mentioned information and indication information related to the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set to the AMF through the response message d in step 1204 .
例如,UDM可以通过调用AMF的服务化操作的方式,向AMF发送上述信息。For example, the UDM can send the above information to the AMF by invoking the service operation of the AMF.
步骤1205,AMF向UE发送注册接受消息,该注册接受消息中包括上述网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。Step 1205, the AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the UE, where the registration acceptance message includes the above network set and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set.
可选的,注册接受消息还包括上述指示信息。Optionally, the registration acceptance message further includes the above indication information.
可选的,注册接受消息还包括allowed NSSAI和rejected NSSAI中的至少一项。或者,步骤905中AMF向UE发送的消息可以是注册拒绝消息(图中未示出),该注册拒绝消息中包括上述网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。除了消息中包含的内容为网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,该步骤的其他细节可参考图9中步骤905的描述。Optionally, the registration acceptance message further includes at least one of allowed NSSAI and rejected NSSAI. Alternatively, the message sent by the AMF to the UE in step 905 may be a registration rejection message (not shown in the figure), and the registration rejection message includes the above network set and information on network slices supported by each network in the network set. Except that the content contained in the message is the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, other details of this step may refer to the description of step 905 in FIG. 9 .
例如,AMF向RAN(图12中未示出)发送注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息,RAN收到注册接受消息后向UE发送该注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息。For example, the AMF sends a registration accept message/registration rejection message to the RAN (not shown in FIG. 12 ), and the RAN sends the registration accept message/registration rejection message to the UE after receiving the registration accept message.
相应的,UE通过RAN从AMF接收注册接受消息/注册拒绝消息。Correspondingly, the UE receives the Registration Accept message/Registration Reject message from the AMF through the RAN.
步骤1206,UE选择与UE待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络。Step 1206, the UE selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,当UE通过步骤1205接收到允许UE注册的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,UE可以根据UE待接入的多个网络切片的信息以及接收到网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,选择支持UE待接入的多个网络切片中的每一个网络切片的多个PLMN。In the first possible implementation manner, when the UE receives the network set that the UE is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network set through step 1205, the UE can access the network slices according to the information of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE. The information and the information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set are received, and multiple PLMNs that support each of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are selected.
举例来说,UE收到的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息, 如上述表3所示。UE待接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2,或者,也可以选择PLMN1和PLMN5,或者,也可以选择PLMN2和PLMN3,或者,也可以选择PLMN3和PLMN5。For example, the network set received by the UE and the network slice information supported by each network in the network set are shown in Table 3 above. The multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2. The UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or PLMN1 and PLMN5, or PLMN2 and PLMN3, or PLMN3 and PLMN3. PLMN5.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,当UE通过步骤1205接收到支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,UE可以根据UE待接入的多个网络切片的信息,选择支持UE待接入的多个网络切片中的每一个网络切片的多个PLMN。In a second possible implementation manner, when the UE receives, in step 1205, a network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and information about network slices supported by each network in the network set, the UE Multiple PLMNs supporting each of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE may be selected according to the information of the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE.
举例来说,UE收到的支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,UE请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2,或者,也可以选择PLMN1和PLMN5,或者,也可以选择PLMN2和PLMN3,或者,也可以选择PLMN3和PLMN5。For example, the network set that supports at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network set received by the UE, the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access are: For network slice 1 and network slice 2, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or PLMN1 and PLMN5, or PLMN2 and PLMN3, or PLMN3 and PLMN5.
也就是说,无论网络集合中的网络是否能够支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片,UE的操作是类似的。换句话说,UE可以不感知收到的网络集合中的网络是否能够支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片的至少一个网络切片。That is, regardless of whether a network in the network set can support at least one network slice of the plurality of network slices that the UE requests to access, the operation of the UE is similar. In other words, the UE may not perceive whether a network in the received network set can support at least one network slice of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access.
步骤1207,UE注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Step 1207, the UE registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
例如,UE根据步骤1206中选择出的与UE待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,注册至该多个网络中的至少一个网络。For example, the UE registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the multiple networks associated with the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE selected in step 1206 .
需要说明的是,若UE通过上述步骤1201至1205的注册流程已经注册至多个PLMN中的第一PLMN,那么UE只需额外注册至多个PLMN中除第一PLMN外的其他PLMN;否则,UE可以额外注册至这多个PLMN。It should be noted that, if the UE has already registered to the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs through the registration process of the above steps 1201 to 1205, the UE only needs to additionally register to other PLMNs except the first PLMN among the multiple PLMNs; otherwise, the UE can Additional registration to these multiple PLMNs.
举例来说,假设UE选择注册至PLMN1和PLMN2,若UE当前已经注册至PLMN1,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN2,类似的,若UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN2,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN1。若UE当前注册至的是PLMN3、PLMN4或PLMN5,则UE重新注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。在这种情况下,UE可以从当前的PLMN去注册。For example, assuming that the UE chooses to register with PLMN1 and PLMN2, if the UE is currently registered with PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered with PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register with PLMN1 . If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
不管是上述任一方式,UE最终都注册至了能够支持待UE接入的多个网络切片的多个PLMN。当UE注册至上述多个PLMN后,即可通过注册至的多个PLMN使用请求的多个网络切片。例如,当UE想使用网络切片2提供的业务时,建立与网络切片2对应的会话,然后通过该会话接入该网络切片2。Regardless of any of the above methods, the UE eventually registers with multiple PLMNs capable of supporting multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE. After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the requested multiple network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to. For example, when the UE wants to use the service provided by the network slice 2, a session corresponding to the network slice 2 is established, and then the network slice 2 is accessed through the session.
通过此方法,UE可以根据待接入的多个网络切片,注册至多个PLMN,使得UE待接入的多个网络切片在多个PLMN的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。Through this method, the UE can register with multiple PLMNs according to the multiple network slices to be accessed, so that the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination with multiple PLMNs, so as to meet the requirements that the UE expects to use. The demand for network slicing provides better services for users and improves user experience.
如上所述,该方法还可以适用于同一个PLMN(HPLMN或VPLMN)内多个子网的场景。该场景下的方法同样涉及UE、AMF和UDM之间的交互。UE可以是图5或图6中的UE,AMF可以是图5中位于NPN中的AMF,也可以是图6中位于NPN1中的AMF,UDM可以是图5或图6中的UDM。类似的,UDM可以获取网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,其中,网络集合包括多个子网,网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息为该多个子网支持的网络切片的信息。这里的网络集合可以包括多个子网(例如,NPN)的标识。可选的,该网络集合还可以包括 每个子网对应的PLMN的标识。例如,UDM可以获取各个子网标识与子网支持的S-NSSAI之间的对应关系,或者,各个子网标识与子网所在的PLMN的标识与子网支持的S-NSSAI三者之间的对应关系。当UE收到与网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息后,选择出支持待UE接入的多个网络切片的多个子网,并注册至多个子网,通过注册至的多个子网使用待接入的多个网络切片。这样,UE待接入的多个网络切片在多个子网的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。As mentioned above, the method can also be applied to scenarios of multiple subnets within the same PLMN (HPLMN or VPLMN). The method in this scenario also involves the interaction between UE, AMF and UDM. The UE may be the UE in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 , the AMF may be the AMF located in the NPN in FIG. 5 , or the AMF located in the NPN1 in FIG. 6 , and the UDM may be the UDM in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 . Similarly, the UDM can obtain information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, where the network set includes multiple subnets, and the information on the network slices supported by each network in the network set is the information supported by the multiple subnets. Information about network slices. The network set here may include the identification of multiple subnets (eg, NPNs). Optionally, the network set may further include an identifier of the PLMN corresponding to each subnet. For example, the UDM can obtain the correspondence between each subnet ID and the S-NSSAI supported by the subnet, or the relationship between each subnet ID and the PLMN where the subnet is located and the S-NSSAI supported by the subnet. Correspondence. After receiving the information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, the UE selects multiple subnets that support multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE, and registers with the multiple subnets. A subnet uses multiple network slices to be accessed. In this way, multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE can be used in combination with multiple subnets, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
如上所述,当该方法应用于跨PLMN的场景,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可以通过SOR信息的方式来实现,其中,SOR信息既可以由UDM生成,或者,也可以UDM请求SOR-AF生成。图13将以UDM请求SOR-AF生成SOR信息为例进行描述。图13将结合图12进行描述。例如,该方法可以包括以下步骤:As mentioned above, when the method is applied to a cross-PLMN scenario, the network set and the network slice information supported by each network in the network set can be implemented by means of SOR information, wherein the SOR information can either be generated by UDM, or, SOR-AF generation can also be requested by UDM. FIG. 13 will be described by taking the UDM requesting the SOR-AF to generate SOR information as an example. FIG. 13 will be described in conjunction with FIG. 12 . For example, the method may include the following steps:
步骤1301,UDM向SOR-AF发送请求消息e。例如,该请求消息e可以为图12中步骤1202的请求消息c中包括的信息。Step 1301, the UDM sends a request message e to the SOR-AF. For example, the request message e may be the information included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
例如,如果上述UE的签约信息指示:在一个VPLMN初始注册的情况下向UE提供SOR信息,UDM确定要获取SOR信息,进而执行上述步骤1301。For example, if the above-mentioned subscription information of the UE indicates that SOR information is provided to the UE in the case of initial registration of a VPLMN, the UDM determines to obtain the SOR information, and then executes the above-mentioned step 1301.
例如,UDM可以通过请求消息e向SOR-AF发送UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。例如,该UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以为图12中步骤1202的请求消息c中包括的UE请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。For example, the UDM may send the information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access to the SOR-AF through the request message e. For example, the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access may be the information of the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, which is included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
例如,UDM可以通过请求消息e向SOR-AF发送UE能力信息。例如,该UE能力信息可以为图12中步骤1202的请求消息c中包括的UE能力信息。For example, the UDM may send the UE capability information to the SOR-AF through the request message e. For example, the UE capability information may be the UE capability information included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
此外,UDM还可以通过请求消息e向SOR-AF发送UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。例如,该UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID可以为图12中步骤1202的请求消息c中包括的UE当前注册的PLMN的PLMN ID。In addition, the UDM can also send the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE to the SOR-AF through the request message e. For example, the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE may be the PLMN ID of the PLMN currently registered by the UE included in the request message c in step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
步骤1302,SOR-AF根据请求消息e中的信息生成SOR信息,该SOR信息可以指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片可参考图12中的步骤1203的描述。Step 1302, the SOR-AF generates SOR information according to the information in the request message e, where the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set. For the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, reference may be made to the description of step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
例如,SOR-AF配置有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI;或者,SOR-AF从NSSF获取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI。然后,SOR-AF根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和UE的签约信息确定允许UE接入的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,进而根据各PLMN支持的S-NSSAI,生成SOR信息。For example, the SOR-AF configures the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement; or, the SOR-AF obtains the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF. Then, the SOR-AF determines the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN that allows the UE to access according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the UE, and then generates SOR information according to the S-NSSAI supported by each PLMN.
SOR信息可以具有如下任一种形式:SOR information can have any of the following forms:
第一种形式:SOR信息包括允许UE注册的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,如上述表3所示。表3中的PLMN1,PLMN2,PLMN3,PLMN4和PLMN5均为UE可以注册的PLMN,UE被允许注册至这五个PLMN中的任意两个或任意两个以上的PLMN。例如,当UE注册至PLMN1和PLMN2,那么UE可以使用PLMN1支持的网络切片S-NSSAI 1和S-NSSAI 3,以及PLMN2支持的网络切片S-NSSAI 2和S-NSSAI 4。The first form: the SOR information includes the set of networks that the UE is allowed to register with and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the set of networks, as shown in Table 3 above. PLMN1, PLMN2, PLMN3, PLMN4 and PLMN5 in Table 3 are all PLMNs that the UE can register with, and the UE is allowed to register with any two or more PLMNs among the five PLMNs. For example, when the UE registers with PLMN1 and PLMN2, the UE can use the network slices S-NSSAI 1 and S-NSSAI 3 supported by PLMN1, and the network slices S-NSSAI 2 and S-NSSAI 4 supported by PLMN2.
也就是说,SOR信息的生成可以不考虑UE请求接入的多个网络切片。在这种情 况下,前述步骤1301中的请求消息e可以不携带UE请求接入的多个网络切片信息。That is, the generation of the SOR information may not consider multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. In this case, the request message e in the foregoing step 1301 may not carry the multiple network slice information that the UE requests to access.
第二种形式:SOR信息包括允许UE注册的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,且网络集合中每个网络至少支持UE请求接入的一个网络切片。The second form: the SOR information includes a set of networks that the UE is allowed to register with and a network slice supported by each network in the network set, and each network in the network set supports at least one network slice that the UE requests to access.
例如,当请求消息e中携带UE请求接入的多个网络切片信息时,相对于上述第一种形式,SOR信息的生成进一步考虑UE请求接入的多个网络切片。也就是说,SOR-AF可以根据UE请求接入的多个网络切片筛选出能够支持UE请求接入的多个网络切片中至少一个网络切片的PLMN,仅提供这种PLMN和该PLMN支持的网络切片的关联信息。以上述例子来说,表3的PLMN 4既不能支持UE请求接入的网络切片1,也不能支持UE请求接入的网络切片2。因此,SOR信息可以如上述表7所示。For example, when the request message e carries information of multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, compared with the first form above, the generation of the SOR information further considers the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access. That is to say, the SOR-AF can filter out the PLMN that can support at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access according to the multiple network slices that the UE requests to access, and only provide this PLMN and the network supported by the PLMN. Slice associated information. Taking the above example as an example, the PLMN 4 in Table 3 can neither support the network slice 1 that the UE requests to access, nor the network slice 2 that the UE requests to access. Therefore, the SOR information can be as shown in Table 7 above.
可选的,请求消息e中携带UE能力信息,SOR-AF可以根据携带UE能力信息确定UE具有接入多个PLMN的能力,进而确定SOR信息。或者,请求消息e中还可以不携带UE能力信息,SOR-AF默认UE具有注册至多个PLMN的能力,从而生成SOR信息。Optionally, the request message e carries the UE capability information, and the SOR-AF may determine that the UE has the capability to access multiple PLMNs according to the UE capability information, and then determines the SOR information. Alternatively, the request message e may not carry the UE capability information, and the SOR-AF defaults that the UE has the capability of registering with multiple PLMNs, thereby generating the SOR information.
不管网络与各自支持网络切片的关联信息是上述哪一种形式,以上SOR信息中的几种形式可以以优选PLMN或接入技术的组合的列表来呈现,或者,也可以以将这些信息进行安全封装后得到的安全包来呈现。Regardless of which of the above forms is the information associated with the network and the respective network slicing support, several forms of the above SOR information may be presented as a list of combinations of preferred PLMNs or access technologies, or the information may be secured The security package obtained after encapsulation is presented.
步骤1303,SOR-AF向UDM发送上述SOR信息。Step 1303, the SOR-AF sends the above SOR information to the UDM.
可选的,SOR-AF还向UDM发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示UE注册至多个PLMN。Optionally, the SOR-AF also sends indication information to the UDM, where the indication information is used to instruct the UE to register with multiple PLMNs.
相应的,UDM从SOR-AF收到SOR信息,根据SOR信息确定网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,然后执行如图12中步骤1204,即通过图12中的步骤1204和步骤1205向UE发送网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。UE收到SOR信息后,通过步骤1206选择与UE待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,并通过步骤1207注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Correspondingly, the UDM receives the SOR information from the SOR-AF, determines the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set according to the SOR information, and then executes step 1204 in FIG. 1205 Send the UE the network set and information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set. After receiving the SOR information, the UE selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE through step 1206 , and registers with at least one of the multiple networks through step 1207 .
例如,UE根据SOR信息选择与UE待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络可以通过如下方式实现:For example, selecting multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE according to the SOR information may be implemented in the following manner:
UE根据接收到的SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器或更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器。然后,UE根据上述选择器来执行PLMN选择。UE如何根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器和用户控制的PLMN选择器的原理是类似的,以下将以UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器为例进行描述。The UE assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information. Then, the UE performs PLMN selection according to the above selector. The principles of how the UE updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector and the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information are similar. The following will take the UE updating the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information as an example for description.
例如,当SOR信息具有步骤1302中所述的第一种形式,即SOR信息包括允许UE注册的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,如上述表3所示,UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,UE根据更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器和待接入的多个网络切片信息选择多个PLMN。例如,更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器如表8所示。例如,PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3)表示PLMN1支持S-NSSAI 1对应的网络切片1以及S-NSSAI 3对应的网络切片3。For example, when the SOR information has the first form described in step 1302, that is, the SOR information includes the network set that the UE is allowed to register with and the information of the network slices supported by each network in the network set, as shown in Table 3 above, the UE according to The SOR information updates the PLMN selector controlled by the operator, and the UE selects multiple PLMNs according to the updated PLMN selector controlled by the operator and the information of multiple network slices to be accessed. For example, the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 8. For example, PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3) indicates that PLMN1 supports network slice 1 corresponding to S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 corresponding to S-NSSAI 3.
表8Table 8
运营商控制的PLMN选择器Operator controlled PLMN selector
PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3)PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3)
PLMN2(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4)PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4)
PLMN3(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4)PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4)
PLMN4(S-NSSAI 3、S-NSSAI 5)PLMN4 (S-NSSAI 3, S-NSSAI 5)
PLMN5(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5)PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5)
例如,UE待接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2,或者,也可以选择PLMN1和PLMN5,或者,也可以选择PLMN2和PLMN3,或者,也可以选择PLMN3和PLMN5。假设UE选择PLMN1和PLMN2,若UE当前已经注册至PLMN1,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN2,类似的,若UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN2,则UE只要额外注册至PLMN1。若UE当前注册至的是PLMN3、PLMN4或PLMN5,则UE重新注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。在这种情况下,UE可以从当前的PLMN去注册。For example, the multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2. The UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2, or can also select PLMN1 and PLMN5, or can also select PLMN2 and PLMN3, or can also select PLMN3 and PLMN5. Assuming that the UE selects PLMN1 and PLMN2, if the UE is currently registered to PLMN1, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN2. Similarly, if the UE has already registered to PLMN2 through the above registration process, the UE only needs to additionally register to PLMN1. If the UE is currently registered to PLMN3, PLMN4 or PLMN5, the UE re-registers to PLMN1 and PLMN2. In this case, the UE can deregister from the current PLMN.
可选的,运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的PLMN根据优先级降序排列。UE可以根据待接入的多个网络切片,选择多个优先级相对最高的PLMN,即选择PLMN1和PLMN2。Optionally, the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE may select multiple PLMNs with relatively highest priorities according to multiple network slices to be accessed, that is, select PLMN1 and PLMN2.
可选的,UE还可以考虑UE当前已经注册至的PLMN来选择多个PLMN,即,选择包含当前已经注册至的PLMN的多个PLMN。举例来说,若UE待接入的切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,且UE通过上述注册流程已经注册至PLMN1,则UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2或选择PLMN1和PLMN5,也就是说,UE可以额外注册至PLMN2或PLMN5。进一步可选的,UE还可以同时考虑UE待接入的多个网络切片、当前已经注册至的PLMN以及运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的优先级选择PLMN,例如,UE可以选择PLMN1和PLMN2。Optionally, the UE may also select multiple PLMNs in consideration of the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered, that is, to select multiple PLMNs including the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered. For example, if the slices to be accessed by the UE are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the UE has registered to PLMN1 through the above registration process, the UE can select PLMN1 and PLMN2 or select PLMN1 and PLMN5, that is, the UE can Additional registration to PLMN2 or PLMN5. Further optionally, the UE may also select the PLMN considering multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE, the PLMN to which the UE is currently registered, and the priority in the PLMN selector controlled by the operator. For example, the UE may select PLMN1 and PLMN2.
当SOR信息具有步骤1302中所述的第二种形式,如上述表7所示,UE根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,UE根据更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器选择多个PLMN。例如,更新后的运营商控制的PLMN选择器如表9所示。例如,PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3)表示PLMN1支持S-NSSAI 1对应的网络切片1以及S-NSSAI 3对应的网络切片3。When the SOR information has the second form described in step 1302, as shown in Table 7 above, the UE updates the PLMN selector controlled by the operator according to the SOR information, and the UE selects multiple PLMN selectors according to the updated PLMN selector controlled by the operator PLMN. For example, the updated operator-controlled PLMN selector is shown in Table 9. For example, PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3) indicates that PLMN1 supports network slice 1 corresponding to S-NSSAI 1 and network slice 3 corresponding to S-NSSAI 3.
表9Table 9
运营商控制的PLMN选择器Operator controlled PLMN selector
PLMN1(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 3)PLMN1 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 3)
PLMN2(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 4)PLMN2 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 4)
PLMN3(S-NSSAI 1、S-NSSAI 4)PLMN3 (S-NSSAI 1, S-NSSAI 4)
PLMN5(S-NSSAI 2、S-NSSAI 5)PLMN5 (S-NSSAI 2, S-NSSAI 5)
例如,UE可以结合上述表4和表9来选择PLMN。例如,当上述注册流程是在PLMN1中执行的,UE待接入的网络切片1对应的S-NSSAI 1已包括在allowed NSSAI中,表示UE可以在PLMN1中使用网络切片1,但是UE待接入的网络切片2对应的S-NSSAI 2包括在rejected NSSAI中,表示UE可以在PLMN1中不能使用网络切片2。那么,UE进一步为网络切片2选择PLMN,即选择支持网络切片2的PLMN。从表9 可以看出,PLMN2和PLMN5支持网络切片2,那么UE可以选择PLMN2或PLMN5注册。或者,运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的PLMN根据优先级降序排列。UE可以选择优先级高的PLMN,即选择注册至PLMN2。For example, the UE may select a PLMN in combination with Table 4 and Table 9 above. For example, when the above registration process is performed in PLMN1, the S-NSSAI 1 corresponding to network slice 1 to be accessed by the UE has been included in the allowed NSSAI, indicating that the UE can use network slice 1 in PLMN1, but the UE is to access network slice 1. The S-NSSAI 2 corresponding to the network slice 2 is included in the rejected NSSAI, indicating that the UE can not use the network slice 2 in the PLMN1. Then, the UE further selects a PLMN for network slice 2, that is, selects a PLMN that supports network slice 2. It can be seen from Table 9 that PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2, so the UE can choose PLMN2 or PLMN5 to register. Alternatively, the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE can select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to register with PLMN2.
当上述注册流程是在PLMN2、PLMN3或PLMN5中执行的,UE的操作是类似的,此处不再赘述。当上述注册流程是在PLMN4中执行的,UE请求接入的网络切片1对应的S-NSSAI 1和网络切片2对应的S-NSSAI 2都包括在rejected NSSAI中,表示UE可以在PLMN4中不能使用网络切片1和网络切片2。那么,UE为网络切片1选择一个PLMN,为网络切片2选择一个PLMN。从表9可以看出,PLMN1和PLMN3支持网络切片1,PLMN2和PLMN5支持网络切片2,那么UE可以在PLMN1和PLMN3中选择一个PLMN,在PLMN2和PLMN5中选择一个PLMN。或者,运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的PLMN根据优先级降序排列。UE可以选择优先级高的PLMN,即选择注册至PLMN1和PLMN2。When the above-mentioned registration process is performed in PLMN2, PLMN3 or PLMN5, the operations of the UE are similar, which will not be repeated here. When the above registration process is performed in PLMN4, the S-NSSAI 1 corresponding to network slice 1 and the S-NSSAI 2 corresponding to network slice 2 that the UE requests to access are included in the rejected NSSAI, indicating that the UE can not be used in PLMN4 Network Slice 1 and Network Slice 2. Then, the UE selects a PLMN for network slice 1 and a PLMN for network slice 2. It can be seen from Table 9 that PLMN1 and PLMN3 support network slice 1, and PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2, so the UE can select one PLMN from PLMN1 and PLMN3, and one PLMN from PLMN2 and PLMN5. Alternatively, the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE may select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to register with PLMN1 and PLMN2.
或者,UE可以直接根据表9来选择PLMN。例如,当上述注册流程是在PLMN1中执行的,由于PLMN1支持网络切片1,不支持网络切片2。那么,UE进一步为网络切片2选择PLMN,即选择支持网络切片2的PLMN。从表9可以看出,PLMN2和PLMN5支持网络切片2,那么UE可以选择PLMN2或PLMN5注册。或者,运营商控制的PLMN选择器中的PLMN根据优先级降序排列。UE可以选择优先级高的PLMN,即选择再注册至PLMN2。当上述注册流程是在其他PLMN中执行的,UE的操作是类似的,此处不再赘述。Alternatively, the UE may directly select the PLMN according to Table 9. For example, when the above registration process is performed in PLMN1, since PLMN1 supports network slice 1, network slice 2 is not supported. Then, the UE further selects a PLMN for network slice 2, that is, selects a PLMN that supports network slice 2. It can be seen from Table 9 that PLMN2 and PLMN5 support network slice 2, so the UE can choose to register with PLMN2 or PLMN5. Alternatively, the PLMNs in the operator-controlled PLMN selector are arranged in descending order of priority. The UE may select a PLMN with a higher priority, that is, choose to re-register to PLMN2. When the above registration process is performed in other PLMNs, the operations of the UE are similar, and are not repeated here.
可以理解的是,当SOR信息为安全包的形式,UE先对该安全包解封装,然后根据上述任一方式来选择并注册至PLMN,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that when the SOR information is in the form of a security package, the UE first decapsulates the security package, and then selects and registers with the PLMN according to any of the above methods, which will not be repeated here.
当UE注册至上述多个PLMN后,即可通过注册至的多个PLMN使用期望的多个网络切片。After the UE registers with the above-mentioned multiple PLMNs, it can use the desired multiple network slices through the multiple PLMNs registered to.
通过此方法,UE可以根据收到的SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器或更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器,当UE根据更新后的选择器选择PLMN时,就有机会注册至多个PLMN,使得UE待接入的多个网络切片有机会在多个PLMN的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该UE期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。Through this method, the UE can assist in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector or the operator-controlled PLMN selector according to the received SOR information. When the UE selects a PLMN according to the updated selector, it has the opportunity to register with multiple PLMNs. This enables multiple network slices to be accessed by the UE to have the opportunity to be used in combination with multiple PLMNs, thereby meeting the requirements of the network slices expected to be used by the UE, providing better services for users, and improving user experience.
此外,在以上各实施例中,在UE收到SOR信息之后,UDM可以再次更新SOR信息,并再次向UE下发更新的SOR信息,本申请在此并不限制。In addition, in the above embodiments, after the UE receives the SOR information, the UDM may update the SOR information again, and deliver the updated SOR information to the UE again, which is not limited in this application.
图14所示为本申请提供的另一种注册至多个网络方法的另一流程交互示意图。该示意图将结合图12和图13中的步骤进行描述。图14涉及网络设备和终端设备之间的交互。例如,终端设备可以为图12中的UE,网络设备可以为图12或图13中的UDM。可选的,该交互还可以涉及AMF,AMF可以为图12中的AMF。例如,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another flow interaction of another method for registering to multiple networks provided by the present application. This schematic will be described in conjunction with the steps in FIGS. 12 and 13 . Figure 14 relates to the interaction between the network device and the terminal device. For example, the terminal device may be the UE in FIG. 12 , and the network device may be the UDM in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 . Optionally, the interaction may also involve an AMF, and the AMF may be the AMF in FIG. 12 . For example, the method includes the following steps:
步骤1401,终端设备向网络设备发送注册请求消息。相应的,网络设备从终端设备接收注册请求消息。Step 1401, the terminal device sends a registration request message to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the registration request message from the terminal device.
例如,网络设备可以是UDM。UDM可以通过AMF从终端设备接收上述注册请求消息。For example, the network device may be a UDM. The UDM may receive the above-mentioned registration request message from the terminal device through the AMF.
例如,注册请求消息中可以包括终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,该请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可以是终端设备requested NSSAI。例如,终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片为网络切片1和网络切片2,终端设备requested NSSAI包括网络切片1的S-NSSAI 1和网络切片2的S-NSSAI 2。该请求接入的多个网络切片的信息可参考图12中的步骤1201中的描述。For example, the registration request message may include information of multiple network slices requested to be accessed by the terminal device, and the information of the multiple network slices requested to be accessed may be NSSAI requested by the terminal device. For example, the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access are network slice 1 and network slice 2, and the NSSAI requested by the terminal device includes S-NSSAI 1 of network slice 1 and S-NSSAI 2 of network slice 2. For the information of the multiple network slices for which access is requested, reference may be made to the description in step 1201 in FIG. 12 .
例如,注册请求消息中可以包括终端设备能力信息。该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。例如,该能力信息具体用于指示终端设备中的SIM卡具有注册至多个网络的能力。所述终端设备能力信息可参考图12中的步骤1201中的描述。For example, the registration request message may include terminal device capability information. The capability information indicates that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks. For example, the capability information is specifically used to indicate that the SIM card in the terminal device has the capability of registering with multiple networks. For the terminal device capability information, reference may be made to the description in step 1201 in FIG. 12 .
对于步骤1401的其他细节,可参考图12中的步骤1201和步骤1202中的描述。For other details of step 1401, reference may be made to the descriptions in step 1201 and step 1202 in FIG. 12 .
步骤1402,网络设备确定第一信息,其中,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及所述网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。Step 1402: The network device determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate a network set and a network slice supported by each network in the network set.
例如,第一信息包括各个网络与每个网络支持的网络切片之间的关联信息。例如,第一信息可以是列表的形式,如图3或图7所示。例如,网络集合可以是指PLMN集合。或者,网络集合可以是指一个PLMN下的子网集合,例如,子网可以是指非公共网络NPN。多个子网可以是HPLMN下的多个子网,或者,可以是VPLMN下的多个子网。For example, the first information includes association information between each network and network slices supported by each network. For example, the first information may be in the form of a list, as shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 7 . For example, the set of networks may refer to the set of PLMNs. Alternatively, the network set may refer to a set of subnets under one PLMN, for example, the subnet may refer to a non-public network NPN. The multiple subnets may be multiple subnets under the HPLMN, or may be multiple subnets under the VPLMN.
一种可选的情况,该第一信息可以包括允许终端设备注册至的网络集合以及该网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。也就是说,第一信息中网络集合中的网络为允许终端设备注册至的网络。该情况下,所述注册请求消息中可以不携带终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。也就是说,网络设备确定第一信息时可以不考虑终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。该步骤可参考图12中步骤1203中的描述。In an optional case, the first information may include a network set to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network slice supported by each network in the network set. That is, the network in the network set in the first information is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. In this case, the registration request message may not carry information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. That is to say, when the network device determines the first information, the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access may not be considered. This step may refer to the description in step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
另一种可选的情况,该第一信息可以包括允许终端设备注册至的网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,并且,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。也就是说,第一信息中网络集合中的网络为允许终端设备注册至的网络,且该网络能够支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。该情况是上一种情况的子集,在该情况中,网络集合中的每个网络至少支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的一个网络切片。例如,所述网络集合包括第一网络和第二网络,其中,第一网络支持终端设备请求接入的网络切片1,第二网络支持终端设备请求接入的网络切片2,该网络集合不包括既不能支持网络切片1又不能支持网络切片2的网络。该情况下,所述注册请求消息中携带终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。In another optional situation, the first information may include a network set to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network slice supported by each network in the network set, and each network in the network set supports the access requested by the terminal device. At least one network slice of the plurality of network slices. That is, the network in the network set in the first information is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and the network can support at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. This case is a subset of the previous case, in which each network in the set of networks supports at least one network slice of the plurality of network slices that the terminal device requests to access. For example, the network set includes a first network and a second network, wherein the first network supports the network slice 1 that the terminal device requests to access, and the second network supports the network slice 2 that the terminal device requests to access, and the network set does not include A network that cannot support neither network slice 1 nor network slice 2. In this case, the registration request message carries information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
可选的,以上的几种情况中所述第一信息中的网络集合可以指示除终端设备已注册至的网络外的其他网络,也就是说,可以不包括当前终端设备已注册至的网络。例如,当终端设备已经注册至第一网络,那么所述第一信息中包括的是排除第一网络外的其他网络的信息。Optionally, in the above several cases, the network set in the first information may indicate other networks except the network to which the terminal device has been registered, that is, may not include the network to which the current terminal device has been registered. For example, when the terminal device has been registered with the first network, the first information includes information about excluding other networks except the first network.
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息,包括:网络设备获取对应信息,对应信息用于指示允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;网络设备根据对应信息,可选的,进一步根据注册请求消息中携带的信息,确定第一信息。例如,网络设备可以先从NSSF或本地配置的信息中获 取有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI,根据有漫游协议的PLMN所支持的S-NSSAI和终端设备的签约信息确定上述对应关系。也就是说,网络设备已知允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息,而后以第一信息的形式呈现允许终端设备注册至的网络以及允许终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。该实施方式的细节可参考图12中步骤1203的描述。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the first information, including: the network device obtains corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register. Slicing; the network device determines the first information according to the corresponding information, and optionally, further according to the information carried in the registration request message. For example, the network device can first obtain the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement from the NSSF or locally configured information, and determine the above-mentioned correspondence according to the S-NSSAI supported by the PLMN with the roaming agreement and the subscription information of the terminal device. That is, the network device knows the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and the information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register, and then presents the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and Information about the network slices supported by each network in the network to which the end device is allowed to register. For details of this implementation, refer to the description of step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
另一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息包括:网络设备向漫游优选应用功能SOR-AF装置发送请求消息,可选的,请求消息中携带注册请求消息中携带的信息;网络设备从SOR-AF装置接收漫游优选SOR信息,网络设备根据SOR信息确定第一信息。也就是说,SOR-AF装置来生成第一信息,并通过SOR信息的方式反馈给网络设备,网络设备根据SOR信息来确定第一信息。例如,此实施方式适用于跨PLMN的场景。该实施方式的细节可参考图13的描述。In another possible implementation manner, the network device determining the first information includes: the network device sends a request message to the roaming preference application function SOR-AF apparatus, optionally, the request message carries the information carried in the registration request message; the network device The roaming preference SOR information is received from the SOR-AF device, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. That is to say, the SOR-AF apparatus generates the first information, and feeds it back to the network device in the form of SOR information, and the network device determines the first information according to the SOR information. For example, this embodiment is suitable for cross-PLMN scenarios. Details of this embodiment can be referred to the description of FIG. 13 .
一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定第一信息,还包括:网络设备根据终端设备当前注册的第一网络确定第一信息,其中,第一信息中的网络集合包括除第一网络外的至少一个网络。也就是说,网络设备确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络后,可以去除掉终端设备当前注册的网络,来确定第一信息。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the first information, and further includes: the network device determines the first information according to the first network currently registered by the terminal device, wherein the network set in the first information includes networks other than the first network. at least one network. That is to say, after the network device determines multiple networks associated with multiple network slices, it may remove the network currently registered by the terminal device to determine the first information.
对于步骤1402的其他细节,可参考图12中的步骤1203中的描述。For other details of step 1402, reference may be made to the description in step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
步骤1403,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息。相应的,终端设备从网络设备接收所述第一信息。Step 1403, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first information from the network device.
第一信息指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息。其中,网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片的信息可参考图12中步骤1203的描述。The first information indicates the network set and information of network slices supported by each network in the network set. For information about the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, reference may be made to the description of step 1203 in FIG. 12 .
例如,UDM向终端设备发送SOR信息,SOR信息包括第一信息。For example, the UDM sends SOR information to the terminal device, and the SOR information includes the first information.
例如,UDM通过AMF向终端设备发送第一信息,终端设备通过AMF从UDM接收第一信息。For example, the UDM sends the first information to the terminal device through the AMF, and the terminal device receives the first information from the UDM through the AMF.
进一步可选的,网络设备向终端设备发送还包括指示所述终端设备注册至多个网络的指示信息。Further optionally, the network device sends to the terminal device indication information that further includes instructing the terminal device to register with multiple networks.
对于该步骤的其他细节,可参考图12中的步骤1204至步骤1205中的描述。For other details of this step, reference may be made to the descriptions in steps 1204 to 1205 in FIG. 12 .
步骤1404,终端设备从第一信息中的网络集合中选择与待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。Step 1404: The terminal device selects multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed from the network set in the first information, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is selected by the multiple network slices. Supported by at least one of the networks.
例如,终端设备待接入的多个网络切片包括第一网络切片和第二网络切片,终端设备选择支持所述第一网络切片的所述第一网络,选择支持所述第二网络切片的所述第二网络。For example, the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device include a first network slice and a second network slice. The terminal device selects the first network that supports the first network slice, and selects all network slices that support the second network slice. the second network.
例如,上述描述可以适用于终端设备直接根据接收到的第一信息进行多个网络的选择的情况。除此之外,上述描述还可以适用于终端设备根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的网络选择器或辅助更新用户控制的网络选择器的情况。可选的,终端设备根据SOR信息更新运营商控制的PLMN选择器或辅助更新用户控制的PLMN选择器,然后根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,选择多个网络。当上述描述还可 以适用于终端设备根据SOR信息辅助更新用户控制的网络选择器时,可选的,所述终端设备根据收到的SOR信息向用户提示第三信息,所述第三信息用于指示用户选择多个网络;所述终端设备接收所述用户的指令,根据所述指令选择所述多个网络。For example, the above description may be applicable to the case where the terminal device directly selects multiple networks according to the received first information. Besides, the above description can also be applied to the case where the terminal device updates the network selector controlled by the operator or assists in updating the network selector controlled by the user according to the SOR information. Optionally, the terminal device updates the operator-controlled PLMN selector or assists in updating the user-controlled PLMN selector according to the SOR information, and then selects multiple networks according to the updated operator-controlled selector or user-controlled selector. When the above description can also be applied to when the terminal device assists in updating the network selector controlled by the user according to the SOR information, optionally, the terminal device prompts the user according to the received SOR information third information, where the third information is used for The user is instructed to select multiple networks; the terminal device receives an instruction from the user, and selects the multiple networks according to the instruction.
关于该步骤的其他细节,可参考图12中步骤1206的描述。For other details of this step, reference may be made to the description of step 1206 in FIG. 12 .
步骤1405,终端设备注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络。Step 1405, the terminal device registers with at least one network among the multiple networks.
注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络是指:若所述终端设备已注册至所述多个网络中的第一网络,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。Registering to at least one of the multiple networks means: if the terminal device has been registered to the first network of the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered to the multiple networks except the first network at least one network; or, the terminal device registers with the multiple networks.
例如,以上述例子为例,当终端设备已通过上述步骤注册至第一网络,那么终端设备根据选择出的多个网络再注册至第二网络。否则,所述终端设备根据选择出的多个网络注册至第一网络和第二网络。For example, taking the above example as an example, when the terminal device has already registered to the first network through the above steps, the terminal device re-registers to the second network according to the selected multiple networks. Otherwise, the terminal device registers with the first network and the second network according to the selected multiple networks.
该步骤其他细节可参考图12中步骤1207的描述。For other details of this step, please refer to the description of step 1207 in FIG. 12 .
通过此方法,终端设备可以根据待接入的多个网络切片,注册至多个网络,使得终端设备待接入的多个网络切片在多个网络的结合下都能被使用,从而满足该终端设备期望使用的网络切片的需求,更好地为用户提供服务,提高了用户体验。Through this method, the terminal device can register with multiple networks according to the multiple network slices to be accessed, so that the multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device can be used in the combination of multiple networks, so as to satisfy the needs of the terminal device. It is expected to use the network slicing requirements to better serve users and improve user experience.
需要说明的是,上述图中的各个消息可具有其他名称。此外,各个网元之间的信息传递,也可通过调用服务化架构下各个网元的网络功能来实现,本发明并不在此限制。It should be noted that each message in the above figures may have other names. In addition, the information transfer between each network element can also be realized by invoking the network function of each network element under the service-based architecture, which is not limited in the present invention.
此外,图9至图14所示的实施例中,UDM可以将不同的网络的上下文信息分开存储,每个网络对应的上下文信息包括服务的AMF(serving AMF)的标识(identifier,ID)。以下以网络为PLMN为例进行描述,同一个PLMN下的子网也与PLMN的情况相似。当UE注册至PLMN时,该服务的AMF为所述UE提供接入管理服务。也就是说,UDM存储不同的PLMN和其对应服务的AMF的关联信息,如表10所示:In addition, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 9 to 14 , the UDM may store context information of different networks separately, and the context information corresponding to each network includes an identifier (identifier, ID) of a serving AMF (serving AMF). The following description takes the network as a PLMN as an example, and the subnet under the same PLMN is also similar to the case of the PLMN. When a UE registers with a PLMN, the serving AMF provides access management services for the UE. That is to say, UDM stores the association information of different PLMNs and their corresponding service AMFs, as shown in Table 10:
表10Table 10
PLMN IDPLMN ID AMF IDAMF ID
PLMN1PLMN1 AMF6AMF6
PLMN2PLMN2 AMF7AMF7
PLMN3PLMN3 AMF8AMF8
当UE先注册至第一PLMN,后续又注册至第二PLMN,若这两个PLMN属于UDM允许UE注册的PLMN,UDM不会对已与第一PLMN关联的服务的AMF执行去注册的操作,也就是说,UDM会保持与第一PLMN关联的服务的AMF处于注册的状态。假如,UE当前注册的PLMN为PLMN1,后续注册至PLMN2,UDM会保存PLMN1和PLMN2各自对应的服务AMF ID,不会对PLMN1对应的AMF6进行去注册。When the UE first registers to the first PLMN, and then registers to the second PLMN, if the two PLMNs belong to the PLMNs that the UDM allows the UE to register, the UDM will not perform the deregistration operation on the AMF of the service associated with the first PLMN, That is, the UDM will keep the AMF of the service associated with the first PLMN in a registered state. If the currently registered PLMN of the UE is PLMN1, and subsequently registers to PLMN2, the UDM will save the corresponding service AMF IDs of PLMN1 and PLMN2, and will not deregister the AMF6 corresponding to PLMN1.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请实施例还提供了通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的终端设备,或者包含上述终端设备的装置,或者为可用于终端设备的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备,或者包含上述网络设备的装置,或者为可用于网络设备的部件。可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行 各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. Correspondingly, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus, and the communication apparatus may be the terminal equipment in the above method embodiments, or an apparatus including the above terminal equipment, or a component that can be used for the terminal equipment; or, the communication apparatus may be It is the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, or an apparatus including the foregoing network device, or a component that can be used for the network device. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the communication apparatus includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
回到图7,图7为根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图。Returning to FIG. 7 , FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
通信装置包括处理模块701、接收模块702和发送模块703。处理模块701用于实现通信装置对数据的处理。接收模块702用于接收通信装置与其他单元或者网元的内容,发送模块703用于接收通信装置与其他单元或者网元的内容。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块701可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件(或者,称为处理电路)实现,接收模块702可以由接收器或接收器相关电路组件实现。发送模块703可以由发送器或发送器相关电路组件实现。The communication apparatus includes a processing module 701 , a receiving module 702 and a sending module 703 . The processing module 701 is used to implement data processing by the communication device. The receiving module 702 is used to receive the content of the communication device and other units or network elements, and the sending module 703 is used to receive the content of the communication device and other units or network elements. It should be understood that the processing module 701 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component (or referred to as a processing circuit), and the receiving module 702 may be implemented by a receiver or a receiver-related circuit component. The sending module 703 may be implemented by a transmitter or a transmitter-related circuit component.
示例性地,通信装置可以是通信装置设备,也可以是应用于通信装置设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述通信装置设备功能的组合器件、部件等。Exemplarily, the communication device may be a communication device device, or a chip applied in the communication device device or other combined devices, components, etc. having the functions of the above-mentioned communication device device.
示例性的,通信装置可以为图9至图14中任一的网络设备或UDM,也可以是图9、图11、图12或图14中的AMF,也可以是图10或图13中的SOR-AF,也可以是图9、图11、图12或图14中的UE。Exemplarily, the communication device may be any of the network equipment or UDM in FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 , may also be the AMF in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 , or may be the one in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 . The SOR-AF may also be the UE in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
当该通信装置为网络设备或UDM时,接收模块702用于获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图9中的步骤902和902,图11中的步骤1101)。处理模块701用于确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络(例如图9中的步骤903,图10中的步骤1001至1003,图11中的步骤1102),其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。发送模块703用于向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息(例如图9中的步骤904和905,图11中的步骤1103),所述多个网络关联的信息用于所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。When the communication device is a network device or UDM, the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg steps 902 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ). The processing module 701 is configured to determine multiple networks associated with multiple network slices (eg, step 903 in FIG. 9 , steps 1001 to 1003 in FIG. 10 , and step 1102 in FIG. 11 ), wherein the multiple network slices Each network slice in is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks. The sending module 703 is configured to send information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device (for example, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ), and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register to the multiple networks.
或者,接收模块702用于获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图12中的步骤1201和1202,图14中的步骤1401)。处理模块701用于根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息确定第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1203,图13中的步骤1301至1303,图14中的步骤1402),第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。发送模块703用于向终端设备发送该第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403)。Alternatively, the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg, steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , and step 1401 in FIG. 14 ). The processing module 701 is configured to determine the first information according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ). The information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. The sending module 703 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ).
或者,接收模块702用于获取终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力(例如图12中的步骤1201和1202,图14中的步骤1401)。处理模块701用于在终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力的情况下,确定第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1203,图13中的步骤1301至1303,图14中的步骤1402),第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。发送模块703用于向终端设备发送该第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403),该第一信息用于终端设备注册至网络集合中的多个网络。Alternatively, the receiving module 702 is configured to acquire capability information of the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks (eg steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1401 in FIG. 14 ). The processing module 701 is configured to determine the first information (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ) when the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks. A piece of information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set. The sending module 703 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ), where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可 参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为UE时,发送模块703用于向网络设备发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图9中的步骤901和902,图11中的步骤1101)。接收模块702用于从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息(例如图9中的步骤904和905,图11中的步骤1103)。处理模块701用于根据多个网络的信息,注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络(例如图9中的步骤906,图11中的步骤1104)。When the communication device is a UE, the sending module 703 is configured to send information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device (eg steps 901 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ). The receiving module 702 is configured to receive information of multiple networks associated with multiple network slices from the network device (eg, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , and step 1103 in FIG. 11 ). The processing module 701 is configured to register with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks (eg, step 906 in FIG. 9 , step 1104 in FIG. 11 ).
或者,接收模块702用于从网络设备接收第一信息,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403)。处理模块701用于从该网络集合中选择与终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络(例如图12中的步骤1206,以及图14中的步骤1404),并注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络(例如图12中的步骤1207,以及图14中的步骤1405)。Alternatively, the receiving module 702 is configured to receive the first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , steps in FIG. 14 ) 1403). The processing module 701 is configured to select multiple networks (eg, step 1206 in FIG. 12 and step 1404 in FIG. 14 ) associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, and register with multiple networks. At least one of the networks (eg, step 1207 in Figure 12, and step 1405 in Figure 14).
此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为AMF时,接收模块702用于执行图9中的步骤901和步骤904,以及图12中的步骤1201和步骤1204;发送模块703用于执行图9中的步骤902和步骤905,以及图12中的步骤1204和步骤1205。此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。When the communication device is an AMF, the receiving module 702 is used to perform steps 901 and 904 in FIG. 9 and steps 1201 and 1204 in FIG. 12 ; the sending module 703 is used to perform steps 902 and 905 in FIG. 9 . , and steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 . In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为SOR-AF时,接收模块702用于从网络设备接收终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图10中的步骤1001,图13中的步骤1301);处理模块701用于根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来生成漫游优选SOR信息(例如图10中的步骤1002,图13中的步骤1302);发送模块703用于向网络设备发送SOR信息(例如图10中的步骤1003,图13中的步骤1303)。SOR信息可以指示多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。或者,SOR信息可以指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。When the communication device is SOR-AF, the receiving module 702 is configured to receive, from the network device, information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1001 in FIG. 10 , step 1301 in FIG. 13 ); processing module 701 is used to generate roaming preference SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1002 in FIG. 10 , step 1302 in FIG. 13 ); the sending module 703 is used to send the SOR information to the network device (eg step 1003 in FIG. 10, step 1303 in FIG. 13). The SOR information may indicate a plurality of networks, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks. Alternatively, the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
图8为根据本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意图,该通信装置包括:处理器801、通信接口802、存储器803。其中,处理器801、通信接口802以及存储器803可以通过总线804相互连接;总线804可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。上述总线804可以分为地址总线、数据总线和控制总线等。为便于表示,图8中仅用一条线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。处理器801可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。处理器还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列 (field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(Generic Array Logic,GAL)或其任意组合。存储器803可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another communication apparatus provided according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication apparatus includes: a processor 801 , a communication interface 802 , and a memory 803 . The processor 801, the communication interface 802 and the memory 803 can be connected to each other through a bus 804; the bus 804 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus etc. The above-mentioned bus 804 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in FIG. 8, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus. The processor 801 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of CPU and NP. The processor may further include a hardware chip. The above-mentioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD) or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general-purpose array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL) or any combination thereof. Memory 803 may be volatile memory or nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
示例性的,通信装置可以为图9至图14中任一的网络设备UDM,也可以是图9、图11、图12或图14中的AMF,也可以是图10或图13中的SOR-AF,也可以是图9、图11、图12或图14中的UE。Exemplarily, the communication device may be the network device UDM in any of FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 , the AMF in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 , or the SOR in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 . -AF, which can also be the UE in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
其中,处理器801用于实现通信装置的数据处理操作,通信接口802用于实现通信装置的接收操作和发送操作。The processor 801 is used for implementing data processing operations of the communication device, and the communication interface 802 is used for implementing receiving operations and sending operations of the communication device.
当该通信装置为UDM时,通信接口802用于获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图9中的步骤902和902,图11中的步骤1101)。处理器801用于确定与多个网络切片关联的多个网络(例如图9中的步骤903,图10中的步骤1001至1003,图11中的步骤1102),其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。通信接口802用于向终端设备发送与多个网络关联的信息(例如图9中的步骤904和905,图11中的步骤1103),所述多个网络关联的信息用于所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。When the communication device is UDM, the communication interface 802 is used to obtain information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (eg, steps 902 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ). The processor 801 is configured to determine multiple networks associated with multiple network slices (eg, step 903 in FIG. 9 , steps 1001 to 1003 in FIG. 10 , and step 1102 in FIG. 11 ), wherein the multiple network slices Each network slice in is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks. The communication interface 802 is used to send information associated with multiple networks to the terminal device (for example, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ), and the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register to the multiple networks.
或者,通信接口802用于获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图12中的步骤1201和1202,图14中的步骤1401)。处理器801用于根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息确定第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1203,图13中的步骤1301至1303,图14中的步骤1402),第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。通信接口802用于向终端设备发送该第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403)。Alternatively, the communication interface 802 is used to acquire information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , and step 1401 in FIG. 14 ). The processor 801 is configured to determine the first information according to the information of the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ). The information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. The communication interface 802 is used to send the first information to the terminal device (eg, steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ).
或者,通信接口802用于获取终端设备的能力信息,该能力信息指示终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力(例如图12中的步骤1201和1202,图14中的步骤1401)。处理器801用于在终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力的情况下,确定第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1203,图13中的步骤1301至1303,图14中的步骤1402),第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片。通信接口802用于向终端设备发送该第一信息(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403),该第一信息用于终端设备注册至网络集合中的多个网络。Alternatively, the communication interface 802 is used to acquire capability information of the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks (eg steps 1201 and 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1401 in FIG. 14 ). The processor 801 is configured to determine the first information (for example, step 1203 in FIG. 12 , steps 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13 , and step 1402 in FIG. 14 ) when the terminal device has the ability to register with multiple networks. A piece of information is used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set. The communication interface 802 is used to send the first information to the terminal device (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 and step 1403 in FIG. 14 ), where the first information is used for the terminal device to register with multiple networks in the network set.
此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为UE时,通信接口802用于向网络设备发送终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图9中的步骤901和902,图11中的步骤1101)。通信接口802用于从网络设备接收与多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息(例如图9中的步骤904和905,图11中的步骤1103)。处理器801用于根据多个网络的信息,注册至 多个网络中的至少一个网络(例如图9中的步骤906,图11中的步骤1104)。When the communication device is a UE, the communication interface 802 is configured to send information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access to the network device (eg steps 901 and 902 in FIG. 9 , step 1101 in FIG. 11 ). The communication interface 802 is used to receive information from a network device of a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices (eg, steps 904 and 905 in FIG. 9 , step 1103 in FIG. 11 ). The processor 801 is configured to register with at least one network among the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks (for example, step 906 in FIG. 9 and step 1104 in FIG. 11 ).
或者,通信接口802用于从网络设备接收第一信息,第一信息用于指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片(例如图12中的步骤1204和1205,图14中的步骤1403)。处理器801用于从该网络集合中选择与终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络(例如图12中的步骤1206或图14中的步骤1404),并注册至多个网络中的至少一个网络(例如图12中的步骤1207或图14中的步骤1405)。Alternatively, the communication interface 802 is configured to receive first information from the network device, the first information being used to indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set (eg steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 , steps in FIG. 14 ) 1403). The processor 801 is configured to select multiple networks (eg, step 1206 in FIG. 12 or step 1404 in FIG. 14 ) associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device from the network set, and register with the multiple networks (eg, step 1207 in FIG. 12 or step 1405 in FIG. 14 ).
此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为AMF时,通信接口802用于执行图9中的步骤901和步骤904,以及图12中的步骤1201和步骤1204;通信接口802用于执行图9中的步骤902和步骤905,以及图12中的步骤1204和步骤1205。此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。When the communication device is an AMF, the communication interface 802 is used to execute steps 901 and 904 in FIG. 9 and steps 1201 and 1204 in FIG. 12 ; the communication interface 802 is used to execute steps 902 and 905 in FIG. 9 . , and steps 1204 and 1205 in FIG. 12 . In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
当该通信装置为SOR-AF时,通信接口802用于从网络设备接收终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息(例如图10中的步骤1001,图13中的步骤1301);处理器801用于根据终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息来生成漫游优选SOR信息(例如图10中的步骤1002,图13中的步骤1302);通信接口802用于向网络设备发送SOR信息(例如图10中的步骤1003,图13中的步骤1303)。SOR信息可以指示多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持。或者,SOR信息可以指示网络集合以及网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片,其中,网络集合中的每个网络支持终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。此外,上述各个模块还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。有益效果可参考前面的描述,此处不再赘述。When the communication device is SOR-AF, the communication interface 802 is configured to receive, from the network device, information about multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1001 in FIG. 10 , step 1301 in FIG. 13 ); the processor 801 is used to generate roaming preference SOR information according to the information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access (for example, step 1002 in FIG. 10 , step 1302 in FIG. 13 ); the communication interface 802 is used to send the SOR information to the network device (eg step 1003 in FIG. 10, step 1303 in FIG. 13). The SOR information may indicate a plurality of networks, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks. Alternatively, the SOR information may indicate the network set and the network slices supported by each network in the network set, wherein each network in the network set supports at least one network slice among the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access. In addition, the various modules described above may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. For the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备(例如UDM)以及终端设备(例如UE),其中,网络设备执行图9至图11中任一所示实施例中UDM执行的方法,终端设备执行图9或图11所示实施例中UE执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device (eg, UDM) and a terminal device (eg, UE), wherein the network device executes the method performed by the UDM in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 . , the terminal device executes the method executed by the UE in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 11 .
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备(例如UDM)以及终端设备(例如UE),其中,网络设备执行图12至图14中任一所示实施例中UDM执行的方法,终端设备执行图12或图14所示实施例中UE执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned network device (eg, UDM) and a terminal device (eg, UE), wherein the network device performs the operations performed by the UDM in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 . method, the terminal device executes the method executed by the UE in the embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备(例如UDM)以及网络设备(例如SOR-AF),其中,UDM执行图10或图13所示实施例中UDM执行的方法,SOR-AF执行图10或图13所示实施例中SOR-AF执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned network device (such as UDM) and a network device (such as SOR-AF), wherein the UDM performs the method performed by the UDM in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 , The SOR-AF performs the method performed by the SOR-AF in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 .
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备(例如UDM)以及网络设备(例如AMF),其中,UDM执行图9、图11、图12或图14所示实施例中UDM执行的方法,AMF执行图9、图11、图12或图14所示实施例中AMF执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device (eg, UDM) and network device (eg, AMF), wherein the UDM executes the UDM in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 . For the method to be executed, the AMF executes the method executed by the AMF in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9至图14中任一所示的实施例中与UDM相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9、图11、图12或图14所示的实施例中与AMF相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10或图13所示的实施 例中与SOR-AF相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9、图11、图12或图14所示的实施例中与UE相关的流程。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement FIGS. 9 to 14 provided by the foregoing method embodiments. The UDM-related process in any of the embodiments shown, or the computer may implement the AMF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 provided by the above method embodiment. , or, the computer can implement the SOR-AF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 provided by the above method embodiment, or the computer can implement the process shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 9 provided by the above method embodiment. 11. The UE-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9至图14中任一所示的实施例中与UDM相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9、图11、图12或图14所示的实施例中与AMF相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10或图13所示的实施例中与SOR-AF相关的流程,或者,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9、图11、图12或图14所示的实施例中与UE相关的流程。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, where the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement any one of FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 provided by the foregoing method embodiments. The UDM-related process in the illustrated embodiment, or the computer can implement the AMF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 or FIG. 14 provided by the above method embodiment, or, The computer can implement the SOR-AF-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 13 provided by the above method embodiment, or the computer can implement the process shown in FIG. 9 , FIG. 11 , and FIG. 12 or the UE-related process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 .
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。该处理器用于读取并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的用于注册至多个网络的方法中由UDM、AMF、SOR-AF或UE的相应操作和/或流程。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地,该芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收处理的数据和/或信息,处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息,并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。The present application also provides a chip including a processor. The processor is configured to read and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes of the UDM, AMF, SOR-AF or UE in the method for registering to multiple networks provided in this application. Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used for reading and executing the computer program in the memory. Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor acquires the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information. The communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip, and the like. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
上述的芯片也可以替换为芯片系统,这里不再赘述。The above-mentioned chip can also be replaced by a chip system, which will not be repeated here.
本申请中的术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "comprising" and "having" in this application, and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion, for example, a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to the explicitly listed Those steps or units listed may instead include other steps or units not expressly listed or inherent to these processes, methods, products or devices.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art can realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above may refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual conditions to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
另外,本申请的说明书和权利要求书及所述附图中的术语“第一”和“第二”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。In addition, the terms "first" and "second" in the description and claims of the present application and the drawings are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific order. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes unlisted steps or units, or optionally also includes For other steps or units inherent to these processes, methods, products or devices.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, this specification and drawings are merely exemplary illustrations of the application as defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of this application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种注册至多个网络的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method of registering with multiple networks, the method comprising:
    网络设备获取终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;The network device obtains information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access;
    所述网络设备确定与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;The network device determines a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is supported by at least one network of the plurality of networks;
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送与所述多个网络关联的信息,所述多个网络关联的信息用于所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。The network device sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, where the information associated with the multiple networks is used for the terminal device to register with the multiple networks.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,所述网络设备确定与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:The method of claim 1, the network device determining a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices, comprising:
    所述网络设备获取对应信息,所述对应信息用于指示允许所述终端设备注册至的网络以及所述允许所述终端设备注册至的网络中每个网络支持的网络切片;obtaining, by the network device, corresponding information, where the corresponding information is used to indicate a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register and a network slice supported by each network in the network to which the terminal device is allowed to register;
    所述网络设备根据所述对应信息和所述终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息,确定与所述多个网络切片关联的所述多个网络。The network device determines the plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices according to the corresponding information and the information of the plurality of network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,所述网络设备确定与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络,包括:The method of claim 1, the network device determining a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices, comprising:
    所述网络设备向漫游优选应用功能装置发送所述终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;sending, by the network device to the roaming preference application function device, information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access;
    所述网络设备从所述漫游优选应用功能装置接收漫游优选信息,根据所述SOR信息确定所述多个网络。The network device receives roaming preference information from the roaming preference application function device, and determines the plurality of networks according to the SOR information.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送与所述多个网络关联的信息,包括:According to the method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the network device sends information associated with the multiple networks to the terminal device, comprising:
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送漫游优选信息,所述漫游优选信息包括所述与所述多个网络关联的信息。The network device sends roaming preference information to the terminal device, where the roaming preference information includes the information associated with the multiple networks.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,还包括:The method of any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising:
    所述网络设备从所述终端设备接收所述终端设备的能力信息,所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。The network device receives capability information of the terminal device from the terminal device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
    所述多个网络包括所述终端设备当前注册的第一网络,所述与所述多个网络关联的信息指示所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络;The multiple networks include a first network currently registered by the terminal device, and the information associated with the multiple networks indicates at least one network in the multiple networks other than the first network;
    或者,所述与所述多个网络关联的信息指示所述多个网络。Alternatively, the information associated with the plurality of networks indicates the plurality of networks.
  7. 一种注册至多个网络的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method of registering with multiple networks, the method comprising:
    终端设备向网络设备发送所述终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息;The terminal device sends, to the network device, information about the multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access;
    所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;The terminal device receives information from the network device for a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices, wherein each network slice of the plurality of network slices is controlled by at least one network of the plurality of networks supported;
    所述终端设备根据所述多个网络的信息,注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络。The terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,所述终端设备根据所述多个网络的信息,注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks, comprising:
    若所述终端设备已注册至所述多个网络中的第一网络,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,If the terminal device has been registered with the first network among the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered with at least one network other than the first network among the multiple networks; or,
    所述终端设备根据所述多个网络的信息,注册至所述多个网络。The terminal device registers with the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收与所述多个网络切片关联的多个网络的信息,包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the terminal device receives information of a plurality of networks associated with the plurality of network slices from the network device, comprising:
    所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收漫游优选信息,所述漫游优选信息包括所述多个网络的信息。The terminal device receives roaming preference information from the network device, where the roaming preference information includes information of the multiple networks.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,所述终端设备根据所述多个网络的信息,注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the terminal device registers with at least one of the multiple networks according to the information of the multiple networks, comprising:
    所述终端设备根据所述漫游优选信息更新运营商控制的选择器或辅助更新用户控制的选择器;The terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assists in updating the user-controlled selector according to the roaming preference information;
    所述终端设备根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络。The terminal device registers with at least one of the plurality of networks according to the updated operator-controlled selector or the user-controlled selector.
  11. 根据权利要求7至10中任一项所述的方法,还包括:The method of any one of claims 7 to 10, further comprising:
    所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述终端设备的能力信息,所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。The terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  12. 一种注册至多个网络的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method of registering with multiple networks, the method comprising:
    终端设备从网络设备接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示网络集合以及所述网络集合中每个网络支持的网络切片;The terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate a network set and a network slice supported by each network in the network set;
    所述终端设备从所述网络集合中选择与所述终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,其中,所述多个网络切片中的每个网络切片被所述多个网络中的至少一个网络所支持;The terminal device selects, from the network set, multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, wherein each network slice in the multiple network slices is selected by the multiple network slices. supported by at least one of the networks;
    所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络。The terminal device is registered with at least one of the plurality of networks.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中的至少一个网络,包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the terminal device is registered to at least one of the plurality of networks, comprising:
    若所述终端设备已注册至所述多个网络中的第一网络,所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络中除所述第一网络外的至少一个网络;或者,If the terminal device has been registered with the first network among the multiple networks, the terminal device is registered with at least one network other than the first network among the multiple networks; or,
    所述终端设备注册至所述多个网络。The terminal device is registered with the plurality of networks.
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 12 or 13, further comprising:
    所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述终端设备的能力信息,所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具有注册至多个网络的能力。The terminal device sends capability information of the terminal device to the network device, the capability information indicating that the terminal device has the capability to register with multiple networks.
  15. 根据权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法,还包括:The method of any one of claims 12 to 14, further comprising:
    所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收指示所述终端设备注册至多个网络的指示信息。The terminal device receives, from the network device, indication information indicating that the terminal device is registered with a plurality of networks.
  16. 根据权利要求12至15中任一项所述的方法,所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 12 to 15, wherein the terminal device receives the first information from the network device, comprising:
    所述终端设备从所述网络设备接收漫游优选信息,所述漫游优选信息包括所述第一信息。The terminal device receives roaming preference information from the network device, where the roaming preference information includes the first information.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,所述终端设备从所述网络集合中选择与所述终端设备待接入的多个网络切片所关联的多个网络,包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein the terminal device selects, from the network set, multiple networks associated with multiple network slices to be accessed by the terminal device, comprising:
    所述终端设备根据所述漫游优选信息中的所述第一信息,更新运营商控制的选择器或辅助更新用户控制的选择器;The terminal device updates the operator-controlled selector or assists in updating the user-controlled selector according to the first information in the roaming preference information;
    所述终端设备根据更新后的运营商控制的选择器或用户控制的选择器,选择所述多个网络。The terminal device selects the plurality of networks according to the updated operator-controlled selector or the user-controlled selector.
  18. 根据权利要求12至17中任一项所述的方法,所述网络集合中的每个网络为允许所述终端设备注册至的网络。17. The method of any one of claims 12 to 17, wherein each network in the set of networks is a network to which the terminal device is allowed to register.
  19. 根据权利要求12至17中任一项所述的方法,还包括:The method of any one of claims 12 to 17, further comprising:
    所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片的信息。The terminal device sends, to the network device, information of multiple network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,所述网络集合中的每个网络支持所述终端设备请求接入的多个网络切片中的至少一个网络切片。19. The method of claim 19, wherein each network in the set of networks supports at least one network slice of a plurality of network slices that the terminal device requests to access.
  21. 根据权利要求1至20中任一项所述的方法,所述网络设备为统一数据管理装置。According to the method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, the network device is a unified data management apparatus.
  22. 根据权利要求1至21中任一项所述的方法,所述多个网络为多个公共陆地移动网络;或者,所述多个网络为第一公共陆地移动网络下的多个子网。According to the method according to any one of claims 1 to 21, the multiple networks are multiple public land mobile networks; or, the multiple networks are multiple subnets under the first public land mobile network.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,所述多个子网为多个非公共网络。23. The method of claim 22, wherein the plurality of subnetworks are a plurality of non-public networks.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器;A communication device, comprising a processor;
    所述处理器用于从存储器中读取并运行程序,以实现如权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法。The processor is adapted to read and run a program from the memory to implement the method of any one of claims 1 to 6.
  25. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器;A communication device, comprising a processor;
    所述处理器用于从存储器中读取并运行程序,以实现如权利要求7至11任一所述的方法。The processor is configured to read and execute the program from the memory to implement the method according to any one of claims 7 to 11.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器;A communication device, comprising a processor;
    所述处理器用于从存储器中读取并运行程序,以实现如权利要求12至20任一所述的方法。The processor is used to read and run a program from the memory to implement the method according to any one of claims 12 to 20.
  27. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform a method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 23.
  28. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得处理器执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium having stored therein instructions which, when run on a computer, cause a processor to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 23.
PCT/CN2020/137703 2020-12-18 2020-12-18 Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks WO2022126631A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080107986.6A CN116762399A (en) 2020-12-18 2020-12-18 Method, device and system for registering to multiple networks
PCT/CN2020/137703 WO2022126631A1 (en) 2020-12-18 2020-12-18 Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/137703 WO2022126631A1 (en) 2020-12-18 2020-12-18 Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022126631A1 true WO2022126631A1 (en) 2022-06-23

Family

ID=82058882

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/137703 WO2022126631A1 (en) 2020-12-18 2020-12-18 Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116762399A (en)
WO (1) WO2022126631A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110691384A (en) * 2019-10-23 2020-01-14 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Network slice using method and device
CN111034336A (en) * 2017-08-11 2020-04-17 Idac控股公司 Traffic steering and switching between multiple access networks

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111034336A (en) * 2017-08-11 2020-04-17 Idac控股公司 Traffic steering and switching between multiple access networks
CN110691384A (en) * 2019-10-23 2020-01-14 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Network slice using method and device

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CHINA MOBILE, HUAWEI, HISILICON, ZTE: "Updating the requirements of Rejected NSSAI for UE not supporting NSSAA in roaming scenerios", 3GPP DRAFT; C1-204719, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. CT WG1, no. Electronic meeting; 20200820 - 20200828, 13 August 2020 (2020-08-13), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051919255 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "Handling of no configured NSSAI for serving VPLMN", 3GPP DRAFT; C1-175156, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. CT WG1, no. Reno (USA); 20171127 - 20171201, 30 November 2017 (2017-11-30), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051362909 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116762399A (en) 2023-09-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7041212B2 (en) Connecting to a virtualized mobile core network
JP7400016B2 (en) Method and apparatus for selecting access and mobility management functions in a mobile communication system
CN109076347B (en) Network slicing operation
US20230023571A1 (en) Service processing method for proximity service, device, and system
US11172405B2 (en) Method for checking change in wireless connection type of terminal in third-party application server
CN108702692B (en) Function selection in a mobile network
US20210234803A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting packet messages based on priority in a wireless communication system
CN108781447A (en) Core node, base station, radio terminal, communication means, method for allocation of radio resource, base station selecting method and readable medium
US11765791B2 (en) Systems and methods for providing low latency services via an evolved packet core network
US20220030117A1 (en) Systems and methods to enable programmable xhaul transport
WO2023072054A1 (en) Method for acquiring slice service and related apparatus
US20230354333A1 (en) Systems and methods for multi-dimensional differentiation of radio access networks
KR20200037675A (en) A method and apparatus for mutually exclusively connecting to a network slice of a roaming terminal in a wireless communication system
CN114007204A (en) Communication selection method and device based on relay communication and direct communication
CN112953748B (en) Communication method and device
US11838988B2 (en) Wireless user equipment (UE) capability data transfer between wireless communication networks
WO2022126631A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for registering to multiple networks
JP2023534824A (en) Method and Apparatus for Supporting Slice Ganging
US11595485B2 (en) Systems and methods for demand-based dynamic service provisioning in an edge computing system
CN117223303A (en) Communication method, device and storage medium
KR20230073580A (en) Method and apparatus for providing service funcation chaining in wireless communications systems
CN115314973A (en) Wireless communication method and communication device
CN117939544A (en) Method, device and system for distributing bearing identifiers
CN115988473A (en) Communication method, communication device and communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20965645

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202080107986.6

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20965645

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1